Downloaded from www.Manualslib.

com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual Preface

Preface

Thank you for purchasing the NICE7000 integrated elevator controller.

The NICE7000 is a new-generation integrated elevator controller independently developed
and manufacturered by Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd., by optimizing the
NICE3000 controller based on a large number of applications and combining new industrial
features.
The NICE7000 has the following advantages:
1. It supports high-performance vector control and open-loop low speed running. It can
drive both AC asynchronous motor and permanent magnetic synchronous motor
(PMSM), and implement switchover between the two types of motors easily by modifying
only one parameter.
2. It supports open-loop low speed running, group control on up to eight elevtors (no
additional external device required), and CANbus and Modbus communication protocols
for remote monitoring, which reduces the required quantity of travling cables.
3. It supports a maximum of 56 floors and is widely applied to elevators used in the
residence, office buildings, shopping centers, and hospitals.
This manual describes the correct use of the NICE7000, including product features,
safety information and precautions, installation, parameter setting, commissioning, and
maintenance & inspection. Read and understand the manual before using the product, and
keep it carefully for reference to future maintenance.
The personnel who involve in system installation, commissioning, and maintenance must
receive necessary safety and use training, understand this manual thoroughly, and have
related experience before performing operations.

-1-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Notes
•• The drawings in the manual are sometimes shown without covers or protective guards.
Remember to install the covers or protective guards as specified first, and then perform
operations in accordance with the instructions.
•• The drawings in the manual are shown for description only and may not match the product you
purchased.
•• The instructions are subject to change, without notice, due to product upgrade, specification
modification as well as efforts to increase the accuracy and convenience of the manual.
•• Contact our agents or customer service center if you need a new user manual or have
problems during the use.
•• Email: [email protected]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual Introduction

Introduction

1. Product overview
The NICE7000 integrates functions of the elevator controller and high-performance vector
control AC drive. With the controller as the core, the elevator drive control system is
constructed.
2. Product features
The NICE7000 has the following major features:
•• More advanced technology
1) Integration of drive and control, which makes system configuration simpler and reduces
peripheral wiring and the cost
2) Distance-based direct travel ride, N curves generated automatically, bringing good
riding comfort
3) Support for parallel/group control of 2 to 8 elevators
4) No-load-cell startup for various types of encoders, ensuring smooth startup
5) Drive for both synchronous and asynchronous motors
6) High-performance vector control, achieving good motor performance and riding comfort
7) Use of CANbus and Modbus communication, reducing the quantity of traveling cables
8) Remote monitoring, making the states of elevators connected to the network be viewed
clearly

•• Easier use
1) Compact structure, requiring only a small equipment room or even no equipment room
2) Parameters easy to memorize, support for commissioning inside the car, making
commissioning convenient
3) Multiple commissioning tools, including keypad, operation panel, host computer
monitoring software, making inspection, commissioning and maintenance of the
elevator easy

•• Safer running
1) Multiple security protections, compliant with the GB-7588-2003 standard, CE
certificated
2) Passing the EU MP lab test, proved to be compliant with the EMC requirements
3) Professional drive manufacturing process, electrical components moisture-proof,
dustproof, and anti-oxidation
4) Lightning absorption and anti-mains voltage fluctuation design for the circuit
5) Password security with corresponding operation rights, implementing protection of
elevator operations

-3-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction NICE7000 User Manual

6) Redundancy of hardware and software, handling of fault signals with highest priority,
preventing accident hazard
7) Support for open-loop low speed running

•• More friendly operation

1) Easy operation and maintenance
2) Built-in real-time clock, which provides time-based services, facilitating intelligent floor
service management
3) Detailed fault records

4) Flexible modular optional parts

3. Function list of the NICE7000

Common Running Functions

In automatic running or attendant state, this function enables the elevator
Full collective
to respond both car calls and hall calls. Passengers at any service floor
selective
can call the elevator by pressing the up call button and down call button.
Down collective In automatic running or attendant state, the elevator responds only to hall
selective control down calls besides car calls.
The system automatically determines different door open time for door
Door open time
open for call, command, protection, or delay according to the set door
setting
open holding time.
In automatic running state, passengers can press the door open button in
Door open holding
the car to delay door open to facilitate goods to be moved in or out.
Door machine
Users can set the required service floors of the door machines.
service floor setting
During door open holding in automatic running state, passengers can
Door pre-close by
press the door close button to close the door in advance, which improves
the door close button
the efficiency.
When the door fails to close within the set time due to the action of the
Forced door close light curtain or safety edge, the elevator enters the forced door close
state, closes the door slowly, and gives a prompt tone.
You can set whether the system keeps outputting commands after door
Door control function
open limit and door close limit based on the type of the door machine.
Floor number display The system supports display of floor numbers in combinations of numbers
setting and letters, which meets the requirements of special conditions.
If the door is blocked by stuff during door close, the light curtain acts and
Light curtain signal
the elevator opens the door. This function is invalid in fire emergency
judgment
state.
Auxiliary operation An optional auxiliary operation box that has the same functions as the
box main operation box is available.
Independent control
When there are two doors for a car, automatic control on the two doors
of the front door and
depends on your requirements.
back door

-4-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual Introduction

If the door lock is not applied after the elevator performs door close for a
Repeat door close certain time, the elevator automatically opens the door and then closes
the door again.
When the main and auxiliary operation boxes are configured, they can
Independent
independently control door open/close according to the commands in
command
automatic running state.
The elevator automatically announces information such as the running
Voice announcement direction and next arriving floor during running.
This function requires use of the MCTC-CHM-B.
Leveling accuracy
The leveling accuracy can be adjusted by setting parameters.
adjustment
The systems implements automatic accurate leveling based on the floor
Auto-leveling
pulse counting and up/down leveling feedback signals.
Response at The system allows the elevator to automatically respond to calls from the
acceleration service floors during acceleration.
Idle elevator In automatic running state, the elevator automatically returns to the set
returning to base parking floor and waits for passengers if there is no car call or hall call
floor within the set time.
If the door open time exceeds the door open protection time but the door
Landing at another
open limit signal is still inactive, the elevator closes the door and then
floor
automatically runs to the next landing floor. The system reports fault E55.
Cancellation of Passengers can press the button consecutively twice to cancel wrong
wrong calls calls.
You can enable or disable the system service for certain floors flexibly
Service floor setting
based on actual requirements.
Time-based floor You can flexibly set the time periods and corresponding service floors or
service select the service floors by using the service floor switchover switch.
The elevator does not respond to any call, and the door needs to
Independent running be closed manually. In the case of group control, the elevator runs
independently out of the group control system.
In attendant state, the running of the elevator is controlled by the
Attendant running
attendant.
When the elevator is in non-inspection state and stops at non-leveling
Low-speed self-
area, the elevator automatically runs to the leveling area at low speed if
rescue
the safety requirements are met, and then opens the door.
The systems perform self-check on the elevator periodically and records
Periodic self-check
error information within the set time, ensuring reliability and security of
in standby state
elevator running.
Waiting floor When the elevator arrives at a floor, the hall indicator of this floor
indicator becomes ON, indicating that the elevator has arrived.
After the elevator arrives at the destination floor, the CTB gives a prompt
Car arrival gong
tone.
Hall arrival forecast When the elevator will arrive at the destination floor soon, the MCTC-
indicator HCB-B outputs a signal to turn on hall arrival forecast indicator.
After the elevator will arrive at the destination floor soon, the MCTC-
Hall arrival gong
HCB-B outputs a signal to turn on the hall arrival gong.

-5-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction NICE7000 User Manual

Hall I/O extension If the hall I/O terminals are not sufficient, more terminals can be provided
function by using an HCB-B board.
Car I/O extension If the car I/O terminals are not sufficient, more terminals can be provided
function by using an HCB-B board.
The system can automatically identify whether a hall call button is stuck
Button stuck check and cancel the stuck call, preventing the condition that the elevator
cannot close and run due to stuck hall calls.
The system automatically implements startup torque compensation based
Automatic startup
on the current car load, achieving smooth startup and improving the riding
torque compensation
comfort.
The system automatically calculates and generates the running curves
Direct travel ride based on the distance, enabling the elevator to directly stop at the
leveling position without creeping.
Automatic The system automatically calculates the optimum speed curve compliant
generation of with the human-machine function principle based on the distance, without
optimum curve being limited by the number of curves or short floor.
Service suspension When the elevator cannot respond to hall calls, the corresponding
output terminal outputs the service suspension signal.
Running times In automatic running state, the system automatically records the running
recording times of the elevator.
Running time The system automatically records the accumulative power-on time,
recording working hours, and working days of the elevator.
Switchover of The main parking floor can be switched over by operating the related
parking floor switch or the switchover time is reached.
Automatic door If the system detects that the door lock circuit is abnormal during door
open upon door lock open/close, the elevator automatically opens and closes the door again,
abnormality and reports a fault after the set door open/close times is reached.
The elevator first directly runs to the VIP floor and provides services for
VIP service
special persons.
Specified elevator
The specified elevator is preferred to respond to calls of specified floors.
preferred
When the elevator is waiting at the leveling position, if there is a call at
Disability service this floor from the disability operation box, the door open holding time is
prolonged. It is the same for the back door.
When the car is full-loaded in automatic running state, the elevator
does not respond to hall calls from the passing floors. These halls calls,
Full-load direct
however, can still be registered, and will be executed at next time of
running
running (in the case of single elevator) or by another elevator (in the case
of parallel/group control).
When the car load exceeds the rated elevator load, the elevator alarms
Overload protection
and stops running.
Elevator abnormality The system performs protection in time at abnormality, guaranteeing
protection elevator safety.

-6-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual Introduction

The system automatically records detailed information of faults, which

Fault data recording
helps improve the efficiency of maintenance and repair.
Inspection-related Functions
Simple maintenance The 3-button keypad on the MCB provides the functions such as
keypad commissioning the running floors and door open/close.
Commissioning and maintenance can be carried out only with easy
Easy setting for setting:
commissioning and motor auto-tuning, slow-down switch detection and shaft detection,
maintenance automatic detection of elevator states, abnormality record, and periodic
self-check
Operation box The operation panel can be connected to the system in the car for
commissioning elevator commissioning, which improves the commissioning efficiency.
Shaft auto-tuning is required before first-time automatic running. During
shaft auto-tuning, the elevator runs from the bottom floor to the top floor
Shaft auto-tuning
at the inspection speed and automatically records all position signals in
the shaft.
User-defined You can view the parameters that are modified and different from the
parameter display default setting.
Inspection function
The system provides multiple inspection functions for users to select.
selection
After entering the inspection state, the system cancels automatic running
Inspection running and related operations. You can press the up or down call button to make
the elevator jog at the inspection speed.

With simple parameter setting, the system can obtain the motor
Motor auto-tuning
parameters no matter whether the motor is with-load or without load.

The system automatically identifies the elevator inertia at startup and

Inertia identification
produces compensation, achieving smooth running.

Every time the elevator runs to the terminal floor, the system automatically
Floor position checks and corrects the car position information based on slow-down
intelligent correction switch 1, and eliminates over travel top terminal or bottom terminal with
use of the slow-down switches.
Considering inaccurate running control at high inspection speed but long
Dual-speed for
running time at low inspection speed, the system provides the dual-speed
inspection
curve for inspection, which greatly improves the efficiency at inspection.
Indication state test Whether indications of system states can be tested.
Test function The system provides multiple test functions for users to select, improving
selection test, acceptance, and maintenance efficiency.
The test running includes the fatigue test of a new elevator, car call floor
test, hall call test, and tests such as hall call response forbidden, door
Test running
open/close forbidden, terminal floor limit switch shielded, and overload
signal shielded.

-7-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction NICE7000 User Manual

Fire Emergency and Security Functions

Returning to
After receiving a fire emergency signal, the elevator does not respond to
base floor at fire
any call but directly runs to the fire emergency floor and waits.
emergency
After the elevator enters the firefighter operation mode, door open/close
is implemented by the jog operation (optional) by using the door open and
Firefighter operation
close buttons rather than automatically. In addition, the elevator responds
to only car calls and only one call can be registered once.
After the security floor function is enabled, the security floor is used at
10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m, and the elevator runs to the security floor first
Security floor
every time, stops and opens the door, and then runs to the destination
floor.
In automatic running state, when the elevator lock switch acts or the set
elevator time is reached, the elevator cancels all registered calls, returns
Elevator lock
to the elevator lock floor, stops running, and turns off the lamp and fan in
the car.
When a floor is specified as the forced stop floor, the elevator stops at
Forced stop at floor
this floor at each time running.
Operation rights The system provides multiple levels of security passwords, each
restricted based on corresponding to different operation rights, improving elevator operation
levels security.
Troubleshooting Faults are classified into different levels based on the severity. Different
based on fault level levels of faults are rectified using different methods.
The system detects the running state of the elevator in real time. If the
Runaway prevention elevator speed exceeds the limit, the system immediately stops running
of the elevator.
Automatic The system automatically identifies power failure and outputs the relay
identification of signal for emergency evacuation automatic switchover to implement
power failure emergency evacuation at power failure.
For the synchronous motor, when the power supply is interrupted, the
system can perform automatic switchover between shorting stator braking
mode and controller drive mode, implementing quick and stable self-
Automatic running rescue.
mode switchover at
power failure Shorting stator braking mode: Upon power failure, EPS is used, the motor
stator is shorted, and the brake is automatically released, making the car
move slowly under the effect of the weighing difference between the car
and the counterweight.
Running direction
When the power supply is interrupted, the system can automatically
self-identification at
identify the current car load and determine the running direction.
power failure
After detecting a position abnormality, the system runs the elevator to
Base floor
each floor until reaching the terminal floor for verification, guaranteeing
verification
system security.
The system automatically determines the fault level. If the safety running
Passenger unloading
conditions are met, the elevator first runs to the leveling position to unload
first upon fault
passengers.

-8-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual Introduction

Interference degree
The system judges the degree of communication interference.
judgment
When the earthquake detection device acts and inputs a signal to the
Earthquake system, the elevator lands at the nearest floor and stops running. After
protection the earthquake signal becomes inactive and the fault is reset manually,
the elevator restores to normal running.
For the PMSM, after the elevator decelerates to stop, the holding current
Current cancellation
of the motor is cancelled in ramp mode, preventing abnormal noise during
in ramp mode
current cancellation.
The NICE7000 system supports not only three-phase 380 VAC but also
Independent working
single-phase 220 VAC to meet different applications of the power supply
power supply
system (such as 220 V UPS)
The system detects the bus voltage and automatically adjusts the running
Automatic voltage
speed of the elevator to adapt to the situation of insufficient power from
identification
power supply (such as EPS).
This function is optional for the group control elevator system configured
with the EPS device. When the EPS is used, the system automatically
selects the elevator that is proper to run based on the preset parameters.
After the normal power supply restores, the system restores normal
Intelligent distribution running.
of emergency power This function prevents power overload due to simultaneous running of
supply (EPS) multiple elevators when the EPS is insufficient.

Note: This function is not the standard function. If it is used, software

modification and peripheral parts are required.
Parallel/Group Control and Other Functions
The system supports parallel/group control of two to eight elevators and
Parallel/Group
provides multiple scheduling algorithms to meet requirements of different
control
customers.
Dispersed waiting In parallel/group control, the elevators can wait at different floors.
If the parallel/group control exit switch of a certain elevator in a parallel/
group control system is valid or the time for exiting the parallel/group
Parallel/Group
control is reached, the elevator exits parallel/group control and runs
control exit
independently. This does not affect normal running of the parallel/group
control system.
If an elevator in the parallel/group control system cannot respond to
Parallel/Group
calls in time due to faults, the elevator automatically exits the parallel/
control automatic
group control system and runs independently. This does not affect normal
exit
running of the parallel/group control system.
The system automatically judges the number of passengers in the car
and compares it with the number of registered car calls. If there are
Anti-nuisance
excessive car calls, the system determines that it is nuisance and cancels
function
all car calls. In this case, passengers need to register correct car calls
again.
Prompt of non-door The system gives a prompt when the elevator stops at a non-door zone
zone stop area due to faults.

-9-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction NICE7000 User Manual

When the elevator is full-loaded, a full-load indication is displayed on the

Full-load indication
HCBs and the elevator directly runs to the desired floors.
Interface for The system provides an interface for intelligent residential management
intelligent residential to perform remote monitoring on the state of elevators in the residential
management district.
Energy-saving Functions
If there is no running command within the set time, the system
Car energy-saving
automatically cuts off the power supply to the lamp and fan in the car.
Energy-saving When the normal power supply is interrupted and the EPS is used, the
running with standby system reduces the running speed of the elevator in the prerequisite of
power supply guaranteeing the smooth running curve.
Arrival gong disabled
Within the set time period, the arrival gong is disabled.
at night
Energy-saving of idle After the car lamp is turned off, the system does not output the door close
door machine command, which reduces power consumption of the door machine.

4. Optional functions

Function Description Remark

After landing at a floor, the elevator may move upward or
downward due to the load change and the car door is not
aligned with the ground, which is inconvenient for in and out MCTC-SCB
Micro-leveling
of passengers and goods. In this case, the system allows the required
elevator to run to the leveling position in the door open state
at the leveling speed.
Power failure For the elevator configured with EPS, the system uses the
emergency EPS to implement low-speed self-rescue in the case of EPS required
evacuation power failure.
Onsite The system can control and monitor running of elevators by NEMS software
commissioning using the NEMS software. required
The control system can be connected to the terminal in the NEMS,
Residential monitoring room. By using the NEMS software, you can view accessories,
monitoring the floor position, running direction, and fault state of the and MCTC-MIB
elevator. required
During normal stop, when the elevator speed is smaller than
0.2 m/s and the door zone signal is active, the system shorts
MCTC-SCB
Door pre-open the door lock by means of the shorting door lock circuit
required
contactor and outputs the door open signal, implementing
door pre-open. This improves the elevator use efficiency.
Passengers need to use the IC card to go to floors that
IC card IC card required
require authorization.

- 10 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents

Preface................................................................................................................... 1
Introduction............................................................................................................. 3
Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions.................................................... 16
1.1 Safety Precautions......................................................................................................... 16
1.2 General Precautions....................................................................................................... 18

Chapter 2 Product Information............................................................................. 24

2.1 System Configuration of the NICE7000......................................................................... 24
2.2 Designation Rules and Model Description..................................................................... 25
2.3 Models............................................................................................................................ 26
2.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 28
2.5 Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions........................................................... 30
2.6 Optional Parts................................................................................................................. 31
2.7 Selection of Adaptable Motor......................................................................................... 32

Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation.................................................. 34

3.1 Mechanical Installation................................................................................................... 34
3.2 Electrical Installation....................................................................................................... 36
3.3 CTB Board (MCTC-CTB)................................................................................................ 39
3.4 Display Board (MCTC-HCB).......................................................................................... 42
3.5 CCB Board (MCTC-CCB)............................................................................................... 54
3.6 Selection and Use of the MCTC-PG Card...................................................................... 56
3.7 Selection of Braking Components.................................................................................. 59
3.8 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices...................................................................... 61
3.9 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE7000 Control System.......................................... 63
3.10 Installation of Shaft Position Signals............................................................................ 63

Chapter 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools......................................................... 70

4.1 Use of the Onboard Keypad........................................................................................... 70
4.2 Use of the LED Operation Panel.................................................................................... 73

Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Functions............................................... 78

5.1 System Commissioning.................................................................................................. 78
5.2 Door Machine Controller Commissioning....................................................................... 82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5.3 Riding Comfort............................................................................................................... 83
5.4 Password Setting........................................................................................................... 87
5.5 System Functions........................................................................................................... 88

Chapter 6 Function Code Table.......................................................................... 102

6.1 Function Code Description........................................................................................... 102
6.2 Function Code Groups................................................................................................. 102
6.3 Function Code Table..................................................................................................... 103

Chapter 7 Description of Function Codes.......................................................... 134

Group F0: Basic Parameters.............................................................................................. 134
Group F1: Motor Parameters............................................................................................. 136
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters................................................................................ 138
Group F3: Running Control Parameters............................................................................. 141
Group F4: Floor Parameters.............................................................................................. 145
Group F5: Terminal Function Parameters.......................................................................... 147
Group F6: Elevator Logic Parameters................................................................................ 153
Group F7: Intelligent Commissioning Parameters.............................................................. 168
Group F8: Auxiliary Logic Parameters................................................................................ 170
Group F9: Time Parameters............................................................................................... 174
Group FA: Auxiliary Parameters......................................................................................... 175
Group Fb: Door Function Parameters................................................................................ 180
Group FC: Brief Fault Information...................................................................................... 183
Group Fd: Parallel/Group Control Parameters................................................................... 184
Group FE: Display Parameters.......................................................................................... 185
Group FF: Factory Parameters.......................................................................................... 186
Group FH: Close-Loop Parameters.................................................................................... 186
Group FL: Extension Terminal Function Parameters.......................................................... 188
Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters....................................................................... 190
Group FU: Monitoring Parameters..................................................................................... 192
Group FP: User Parameters............................................................................................... 200
Groups E: Fault Details...................................................................................................... 201

Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting.................................................... 204

8.1 Maintenance................................................................................................................. 204

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8.2 Description of Fault Levels........................................................................................... 205
8.3 Fault Information and Troubleshooting......................................................................... 207

Chapter 9 EMC................................................................................................... 224

9.1 Definition of Terms........................................................................................................ 224
9.2 Introduction to EMC Standard...................................................................................... 224
9.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices.......................................................................... 225
9.4 Shielded Cable............................................................................................................. 228
9.5 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems...................................................... 230

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1
Safety Information and Precautions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 Safety Information and Precautions NICE7000 User Manual

Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions

In this manual, the notices are graded based on the degree of danger:

•• DANGER indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in severe personal
injury or even death.

•• CAUTIONindicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in minor or moderate
personal injury or equipment damage.

In addition, NOTE appearing in other chapters indicates that an unintended result or

situation may occur if the notice is not complied with.
The notices in this manual you have to observe are aimed at guaranteeing your personal
safety, as well as to prevent damage to the controller or the parts connected to it. Read this
chapter carefully so that you have a thorough understanding and perform all operations by
following the notices in this chapter. The equipment is allowed to be operated by electrical
engineers that are qualified by the factory or agent and have received processional training.
Monarch will assume no liability or responsibility for any injury or loss caused by improper
operation.

1.1 Safety Precautions

Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions

•• Do not install the equipment if you find water seepage,
component missing or damage upon unpacking.
•• Do not install the equipment if the packing list does not conform
to the product you received.
DANGER •• Install the equipment on incombustible objects such as metal,
and keep it away from combustible materials. Failure to comply
may result in a fire.
•• Do not loosen the fixed screws of the components, especially
the screws with red mark.
During
•• Handle the equipment with care during transportation to prevent
installation
damage to the equipment.
•• Do not use the equipment with damaged or missing
components. Failure to comply will result in personal injury.
•• Do not touch the components with your hands. Failure to
CAUTION
comply will result in static electricity damage.
•• Do not drop wire end or screw into the controller. Failure to
comply will result in damage to the controller.
•• Install the controller in places free of vibration and direct
sunlight.

- 16 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 1 Safety Information and Precautions

Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions

•• Wiring must be performed only by qualified personnel under
instructions described in this manual. Failure to comply may
result in unexpected accidents.
•• A circuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply and
DANGER
the controller. Failure to comply may result in a fire.
•• Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring. Failure to
comply may result in electric shock.
•• Tie the controller to ground properly according to the standard.
Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
•• Never connect the power cables to the output terminals (U, V,
W) of the controller. Pay attention to the marks of the wiring
At wiring terminals and ensure correct wiring. Failure to comply will result
in damage to the controller.
•• Ensure that the cabling satisfies the EMC requirements and
the local codes. Use wire sizes recommended in the manual.
Failure to comply may result in accidents.
CAUTION
•• Never connect the regen. resistor between the DC bus
terminals (+) and (-). Failure to comply may result in a fire.
•• Use the shielded cable for the encoder, and ensure that the
shield is reliably grounded at one end.
•• Use a twisted cable with twisted distance of 20−30 mm as the
communication cable, and ensure that the shield is reliably
grounded.
•• All peripheral devices must be connected properly according to
the circuit wiring instructions provided in this manual. Failure to
comply will result in accidents
•• Cover the controller properly before power-on to prevent
electric shock.
•• Do not open the controller’s cover after power-on. Failure to
comply may result in electric shock.
•• Do not touch the controller and peripheral circuits with wet
hand. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.

During •• Do not touch any I/O terminal of the controller. Failure to

DANGER comply may result in electric shock.
running
•• The controller performs safety detection on external strong
power circuits automatically at the beginning of power-on. Do
not touch the U, V, W terminals of the controller or the motor
terminals at the moment. Failure to comply may result in
electric shock.
•• Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the
temperature. Failure to comply will result in personal burnt.
•• Signal detection must be performed only by qualified personnel
during operation. Failure to comply will result in personal injury
or damage to the controller.

- 17 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 Safety Information and Precautions NICE7000 User Manual

Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions

•• Check that the following requirements are met:
-- The voltage class of the power supply is consistent with the
rated voltage class of the controller.
-- The input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W)
are properly connected.
-- No short-circuit exists in the peripheral circuit.
-- The wiring is secured.
•• Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
•• For synchronous motor, ensure that motor auto-tuning is
performed successfully. Perform trial running before resuming
During the steel rope so as to make the motor run properly.
CAUTION
running
•• Do not perform the voltage resistance test on any part of the
controller because such test has been done in the factory.
Failure to comply will result in accidents.
•• Do not touch the rotating part of the motor during the motor
auto-tuning or running. Failure to comply will result in accidents.
•• Do not change the default settings of the controller. Failure to
comply may result in damage to the controller.
•• Avoid objects falling into the controller when it is running.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
•• Do not start/stop the controller by turning on or off the contactor.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
•• Do not repair or maintain the controller at power-on. Failure to
comply will result in electric shock.
•• Repair or maintain the controller when its voltage is lower than
36 VAC, about 10 minutes after the controller is powered off.
Otherwise, the residual voltage in the capacitor may result in
During personal injury.
DANGER
maintenance •• Do not allow unqualified personnel to repair or maintain the
controller. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or
damage to the controller.
•• Set the parameters again after the controller is replaced. All the
pluggable components must be plugged or removed only after
power-off.

1.2 General Precautions

1. Requirement on the residual current device (RCD)
The controller generates high leakage current during running, which flows through the
protective earthing conductor. Thus install a type- B RCD at primary side of the power
supply. When selecting the RCD, you should consider the transient and steady-state
leakage current to ground that may be generated at startup and during running of the

- 18 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 1 Safety Information and Precautions

controller. You can select a specialized RCD with the function of suppressing high
harmonics or a general-purpose RCD with relatively large residual current.
2. Motor insulation test
Perform the insulation test when the motor is used for the first time, or when it is reused
after being stored for a long time, or in a regular check-up, in order to prevent the
poor insulation of motor windings from damaging the controller. The motor must be
disconnected from the controller during the insulation test. A 500-V mega-Ohm meter is
recommended for the test. Ensure that the insulation resistance is not less than 5 MΩ.
U VW Motor input
terminals

Megameter

Ground

3. Thermal protection of motor

If the rated capacity of the motor selected does not match that of the controller,
especially when the rated power of the controller is greater than that of the motor, adjust
the motor protection parameters on the operation panel of the controller or install a
thermal relay for the motor circuit for protection.
4. Motor heat and noise
The output of the controller is pulse width modulation (PWM) wave with certain harmonic
wave, and therefore, the motor temperature rise, noise, and vibration are slightly greater
than those at running with the mains frequency.
5. Voltage-sensitive device or capacitor on the output side of the controller
The controller outputs PWM waves, and therefore, do not install the capacitor for
improving power factor or lightning protection voltage-sensitive resistor on the output
side of the controller. Otherwise, the controller may suffer transient overcurrent or even
be damaged.

Controller

U V W

Capacitor or
M varistor

- 19 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 Safety Information and Precautions NICE7000 User Manual

6. Switch (contactor) on the input and output sides of the controller

If a contactor is installed between the power supply and the input side of the controller,
DO NOT use it to start or stop the controller. However, if there is a need to use the
contactor to start or to stop the controller, make sure the time interval between switching
is at least one hour. If the interval between switching is shorter than one hour, this will
reduce the service life of the capacitor inside the controller.
If a switch such as contactor is installed between the output side of the controller
and the motor, operate the switch only when the controller has no output. Otherwise,
modules inside the controller may be damaged.
Input Output contactor
contactor other switch

R U
380 VAC
50/60 Hz S Controller V M
T W

7. Use outside the rated voltage

The controller must not be used outside the allowable voltage range specified in this
manual. Otherwise, components inside the controller may be damaged. If required, use
a corresponding voltage step-up or step-down device.
8. Surge suppressor
The controller has a built-in voltage dependent resistor (VDR) for suppressing the surge
voltage generated when the inductive loads (electromagnetic contactor, electromagnetic
relay, solenoid valve, electromagnetic coil and electromagnetic brake) around the
controller are switched on or off. If the inductive loads generate very high surge voltage,
use a surge suppressor for the inductive load or use a surge suppressor together with a
diode..

Note

Do not connect the surge suppressor on the output side of the controller.

9. Altitude and de-rating

In places where the altitude is above 1000 m and the cooling effect reduces due to thin
air, it is necessary to de-rate the controller. Contact Monarch for technical support.
10. Special usage
If wiring that is not described in this manual, such as common DC bus is applied, contact
the agent or Monarch for technical support.
11. Disposal
The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuits and PCB may explode when they are
burnt. Poisonous gas is generated when the plastic parts are burnt. Treat them as
ordinary industrial waste.

- 20 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 1 Safety Information and Precautions

12. Adaptable motor

The controller is adaptable to squirrel-cage asynchronous motor or AC PMSM. Select a
proper controller according to motor nameplate.
The default parameters configured inside the controller are squirrel-cage asynchronous
motor parameters. It is still necessary to perform motor auto-tuning or modify the
default values based on actual conditions. Otherwise, the running effect and protection
performance will be affected. For PMSM, motor auto-tuning must be performed.
13. Precautions on selecting residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB)
Tripping may be caused if an improper RCCB is selected when the controller drives
the motor. This is because the output wave of the controller has high harmonics and
the motor cable and the cable connecting the controller and the motor produce leakage
current, which is much larger than the current when the motor runs at the mains
frequency.
Thus, it is necessary to determine the proper RCCB sensitivity based on the general
leakage current of the cables and the motor. The leakage current is dependent on the
motor capacity, cable length, insulation class and wiring method. Generally, the leakage
current on the output side of the controller is three times of the current when the motor
runs at the mains frequency.

- 21 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 Safety Information and Precautions NICE7000 User Manual

- 22 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2
Product Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2 Product Information NICE7000 User Manual

Chapter 2 Product Information

2.1 System Configuration of the NICE7000

The NICE7000 series integrated elevator control system mainly includes the integrated
elevator controller, car top board (MCTC-CTB), hall call board (MCTC-HCB), and car call
board (MCTC-CCB).
The following figure shows the system components.
Figure 2-1 System components of the NICE7000

NICE7000 integrated controller

LED operation panel Synchronous or

(MDKE) asynchronous motor

Host
computer
MCTC-CTB
CANbus
Communication
in parallel mode
Modbus
CANbus

MCTC-HCB

Load cell MCTC-HCB MCTC-CCB

MCTC-HCB

1. It controls the motor based on feedback signals from the encoder, and records
information of all position switches in the shaft by pulse, implementing accurate leveling
and direct travel ride and guaranteeing running safety.
2. It implements information collection and control of car-related components by means of
CANbus communication with the MCTC-CTB.
3. It registers and displays hall calls of all floors with easy address setting by means of
Modbus communication with the MCTC-HCB.

- 24 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 2 Product Information

The following figure shows the system structure of the NICE7000.

Figure 2-2 System structure of the NICE7000
Modbus NICE7000 integrated elevator
MCTC-HCB controller

Power supply
CANbus circuit
MCTC-CTB

Control circuit of the controller

MCTC-CCB Input power
Encoder feedback
Modbus Drive circuit
MCTC-HCB of the motor U
V Encoder
M
W
Motor
MCTC-HCB

Braking unit

MCTC-HCB

2.2 Designation Rules and Model Description

2.2.1 Designation Rules and Nameplate

Figure 2-3 Designation rules and nameplate of the NICE7000

NICE L Q X 40 15 A0
NICE series integrated
elevator controller Mark Structure
A0 Enclosusre
B0 Semi-enclosure
Mark Controller Type
C0 Full open
L For elevator
Mark Power Rating
Mark Subcategory
02 2.2 kW
Q NICE7000
03 3.7 kW
Mark Voltage Class ~ ~
20 Single/Three-phase 220 V 30 30 kW
40 Three-phase 380 V 45 45 kW

Nameplate
Controller model MODEL: NICE-LQX-4015-A0
Rated input INPUT: 3PH AC380-440V 36A 50/60Hz
Rated output OUTPUT: 3PH AC 0-440V 33A 0-99Hz 15kw
Manufacturing SN S/N: 010150602803825403

Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co.Ltd

The NICE7000 can drive both the AC asynchronous motor and PMSM. When encoder is
used, select a PG card matching the encoder type.
The structure in the controller model indicates the degree to which the PCB is enclosed by
the shell.
The NICE7000 has three structures, as shown in the following figure.

- 25 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2 Product Information NICE7000 User Manual

Figure 2-4 NICE7000 structures

NICE-LQX-4015-A0 NICE-LQX-4015-B0

NICE-LQX-4015-C0

2.3 Models
Table 2-1 NICE7000 models

Power Input Current Output Current Motor Power

Controller Model
Capacity (kVA) (A) (A) (kW)
Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-LQX-2002-A/B/C0 4.0 11.0 9.6 2.2
NICE-LQX-2003-A/B/C0 5.9 17.0 14.0 3.7
220-NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 7.0 20.5 18.0 4.0
220-NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 10.0 29.0 27.0 5.5
220-NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 12.6 36.0 33.0 7.5
220-NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 15.0 41.0 39.0 11.0
220-NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 18.3 49.0 48.0 15.0
220-NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 23.0 62.0 60.0 18.5
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-LQX-2002-A/B/C0 2.0 9.2 5.2 1.1
NICE-LQX-2003-A/B/C0 2.9 13.3 7.5 1.5
220-NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 3.9 17.9 10.3 2.2
220-NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 5.9 25.3 15.5 3.7
220-NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 7.3 31.3 19 4.0
220-NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 8.6 34.6 22.5 5.5

- 26 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 2 Product Information

Power Input Current Output Current Motor Power

Controller Model
Capacity (kVA) (A) (A) (kW)
220-NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 10.6 42.6 27.7 11
220-NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 13.1 52.6 34.6 15
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-LQX-4002-A/B/C0 4.0 6.5 5.1 2.2
NICE-LQX-4003-A/B/C0 5.9 10.5 9.0 3.7
NICE-LQX-4005-A/B/C0 8.9 14.8 13.0 5.5
NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 11.0 20.5 18.0 7.5
NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 17.0 29.0 27.0 11.0
NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 21.0 36.0 33.0 15.0
NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 24.0 41.0 39.0 18.5
NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 30.0 49.5 48.0 22.0
NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 40.0 62.0 60.0 30.0
NICE-LQX-4037-A/B/C0 57.0 77.0 75.0 37.0
NICE-LQX-4045-A/B/C0 69.0 93.0 91.0 45.0
NICE-LQX-4055-A/B/C0 85.0 113.0 112.0 55.0
NICE-LQX-4075-A/B/C0 114.0 157.5 150.0 75.0
NICE-LQX-4090-A/B/C0 134.0 180.0 176.0 90.0
NICE-LQX-4110-A/B/C0 160.0 214.0 210.0 110.0
NICE-LQX-4132-A/B/C0 192.0 256.0 253.0 132.0
NICE-LQX-4160-A/B/C0 231.0 307.0 304.0 160.0

Note

1. In terms of single-phase and three-phase 220 VAC, NICE-LQX-2002-A/B/C0 and NICE-LQX-

2003-A/B/C0 are specially designed for 220 VAC. The other models that are marked by prefixing
"220-" are modified from the three-phase 380 VAC models.
2. Same models are available for single-phase 220 VAC and three-phase 220 VAC. Pay attentions
to the power class of the adaptable motor during the use.
3. The models of rated 220 VAC apply to European 240 VAC supply system, and the models of
380 VAC apply to European 440 VAC supply system.

- 27 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2 Product Information NICE7000 User Manual

2.4 Technical Specifications

Table 2-2 Technical specifications of the NICE7000

Item Specification
Maximum frequency 99 Hz
2–16 kHz, adjusted automatically based on the load
Carrier frequency
features
•• Sensorless vector control (SVC)
Motor control mode •• Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
•• Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
0.5 Hz: 180% (SVC)
Startup torque
0 Hz: 200% (CLVC)
•• 1:100 (SVC)
Speed adjustment
•• 1:1000 (CLVC)
range
•• 1:50 (V/F)

Speed stability •• ±0.5% (SVC)

accuracy •• ±0.05% (CLVC)
Torque control
±5% (CLVC)
accuracy
60s for 150% of the rated current, 1s for 200% of the rated
Basic Overload
current
specifications
Motor auto-tuning With-load auto-tuning; no-load auto-tuning
Direct travel ride mode in which the leveling position can
Distance control
be adjusted flexibly
Acceleration/
N curves generated automatically
Deceleration curve
New reliable slow-down function, automatically identifying
Slow-down
the position of the slow-down shelf
Shaft auto-tuning 32-bit data, recording the position in the shaft accurately
Leveling adjustment Flexible and easy leveling adjustment function
Startup torque Load cell startup pre-torque compensation
compensation No-load-cell startup pre-torque self-adaption
Real-time clock for time-based floor service, peak service
Real-time clock
and automatic password
Easy to implement multiple elevators commissioning
Test function
functions.
Fault protection Solutions to different levels of elevator faults
Intelligent Remote monitoring, user management, and group control
management adjustment

- 28 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 2 Product Information

Item Specification
Security check of
Security check of peripheral devices, such as grounding
peripheral devices
Basic and short circuit, after power-on
after power-on
specifications
Monitoring the state of feedback signals to ensure that the
Status monitor
elevator works properly
28 x DI
Input specification: 24 V, 5 mA
Digital input (DI) 3 heavy-current detection input terminals of safety circuit
and door lock circuit
Input specification: 95−125 V
Analog input (AI) AI (voltage range: –10 V to +10 V)
I/O feature
2 CANbus communication ports
Communication port
2 Modbus communication ports
Output terminal 9 relay outputs
block The terminals can be allocated with different functions.
Supporting different encoders by using an optional PG
Encoder interface
card
3-digit LED display, implementing certain commissioning
Keypad
functions
Operation 5-digit LED display, querying/modifying most parameters
LED operation panel
and display and monitoring the system state
Host computer Connecting the control system and the host computer,
monitoring software convenient for querying/motoring the system state.
Altitude Below 1000 m (de-rated 1% for each 100 m higher)
Ambient –10°C to 40°C (de-rated if the ambient temperature is
temperature above 40°C, maximum temperature: 50°C)
Humidity Maximum relative humidity 95%, non-condensing
Vibration Maximum vibration: 5.9 m/s2
Environment
Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C
IP level IP20
Pollution degree PD2
Power distribution
TN, TT
system

- 29 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2 Product Information NICE7000 User Manual

2.5 Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions

The following figure shows the physical appearance and mounting dimensions of the
NICE7000.

Figure 2-5 Physical appearance and mounting dimensions of the NICE7000

W W
A A
D D
Φ

B H
B H

2.2 kW < P ≤ 30 kW 30 kW < P ≤ 160 kW

Table 2-3 Mounting dimensions of the NICE7000

A B H W D Φ Weight
Controller Model
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
Single/Three-phase 20 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-LQX-2002-A/B/C0
NICE-LQX-2003-A/B/C0 190 336 356 240 135 6.5 6.6
220-NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0
220-NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0
190 336 356 273 140 6.5 9.1
220-NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0
220-NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0
220-NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 300 339 361 410 172 7 19.1
220-NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-LQX-4002-A/B/C0
NICE-LQX-4003-A/B/C0
190 336 356 240 135 6.5 6.6
NICE-LQX-4005-A/B/C0
NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0

- 30 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 2 Product Information

A B H W D Φ Weight
Controller Model
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0
190 336 356 273 140 6.5 9.1
NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0
NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0
NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 300 339 361 410 172 7 19.1
NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0
NICE-LQX-4037-A/B/C0
NICE-LQX-4045-A/B/C0 260 580 600 385 265 10 32
NICE-LQX-4055-A/B/C0
NICE-LQX-4075-A/B/C0
343 678 700 473 307 10 47
NICE-LQX-4090-A/B/C0
NICE-LQX-4110-A/B/C0
NICE-LQX-4132-A/B/C0 449 903 930 579 380 10 90
NICE-LQX-4160-A/B/C0

Note

For the models of other higher power classes (such as above 160 kW) that are still not often
applied onsite, the preceding table does not list the mounting dimensions. If you need such
models, directly contact Monarch.

2.6 Optional Parts

If any optional part in the following table is required, specify it in your order.
Table 2-4 Optional parts of the NICE7000

Name Model Function Remark

For details,
External It is provided for the NICE7000 of 37 kW see section 3.7
MDBUN
braking unit and above. "Selection of Braking
Components".
It is used to adapt to the push-pull and
MCTC-PG-A2 -
open-collector incremental encoders.
It is used to adapt to the UVW differential
encoder and applied to synchronous
MCTC-PG-D motor. -
PG card
It requires 5 V power supply.
It is used to adapt to the SIN/COS
MCTC-PG-E -
encoder.
It is used to adapt to the absolute encoder
MCTC-PG-F1
(Heidenhain ECN413/1313)

- 31 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2 Product Information NICE7000 User Manual

Name Model Function Remark

The MCTC-CTB is the car control
Car top board of the NICE7000. It has 8 DIs, 1
board MCTC-CTB AI and 9 relay outputs (7 as standard -
(CTB) configuration). It can communicate with
the CCB and HCB simultaneously.
The HCB receives the passenger calls A number of HCB
Hall call
and displays the floor where the elevator models are available.
board MCTC-HCB
is located and the running direction. It can For details, see
(HCB)
also be used as car display board. section 3.4.
The MCTC-CCB is another interface for
Car call
passengers to interact with the control
board MCTC-CCB -
system. It mainly collects the car alls and
(CCB)
outputs the call indicator state.
External It provides the
LED It is the external LED display and RJ45 interface for
MDKE
operation operation panel. connecting to the
panel controller.
The cable length is
Extension It is a standard 8-core network cable and
MDCAB 3 m in the standard
cable can be connected to MDKE.
configuration.

2.7 Selection of Adaptable Motor

The main counters of the electrical relationship between the controller and the motor are
voltage and current.
1. In general elevator applications, the input mains voltage is 380 V, and the motor voltage
can only be equal to or smaller than 380 V. Thus, when selecting the NICE7000, you
can take only the current of the motor into consideration.
2. When the NICE7000 is designed, large safety allowance is reserved for the main power
module. The controller can run properly within the nominal output current. During stable
running, the maximum output torque is 150% of the rated torque and can reach up to
200% of the rated torque for a short time.
Therefore, for the motor with the rated voltage of 380 V, you can select the controller of the
same power class. As long as the rated current of the motor is smaller than 1.1 times of the
controller output current, the controller of the same power class can also be used.
Generally speaking, select an adaptable motor based on the output current of the controller
and ensure that the rated current of the motor is equal to or smaller than the output current
of the controller. For technical specifications of the controller, see section 2.4.

- 32 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3
Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

3.1 Mechanical Installation

3.1.1 Installation Environment Requirements

Item Requirements
Ambient
-10°C to 50°C
temperature
Install the controller on the surface of an incombustible object, and ensure
Heat dissipation that there is sufficient space around for heat dissipation.
Install the controller vertically on the support using screws.
Free from direct sunlight, high humidity and condensation
Mounting
Free from corrosive, explosive and combustible gas
location
Free from oil dirt, dust and metal powder
Vibration Less than 0.6 g
The controllers of plastic housing are whole-unit built-in products and need
Protective to be installed in the final system. The final system must have the required
enclosure fireproof cover, electrical protective cover and mechanical protective cover,
and satisfy the regional laws & regulations and related IEC requirements.

3.1.2 Installation Clearance Requirements

The clearance that needs to be reserved varies with the power class of the NICE7000, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-1 Clearance around the NICE7000 for installation
Hot air

Power Class Clearance Requirements

1.1-18.5 kW A ≥ 10 mm B ≥ 100 mm
A A
22-45 kW A ≥ 50 mm B ≥ 100 mm

The controller should be

installed vertically upward.
Cold air

The NICE7000 is installed vertically upward on the support with screws fixed into the four
mounting holes, as shown in the following figure.

- 34 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Figure 3-2 Diagram of mounting holes

Fastener Fastening
torque
1.1 kW ≤ P ≤ 15 kW
2.5 Nm
4-M5x15 bolt With fixing
4-M5x15 screw washer
NICE7000
4-M5x15 washer
18.5 kW ≤ P ≤ 45 kW 3.5 Nm
4-M6x15 bolt With fixing
4-M6x15 screw washer
4-M6x15 washer

Fixing
backplane

The controller is generally installed in the control cabinet of the elevator equipment room.
Pay attention to the following points when designing the control cabinet:
1. The temperature inside the cabinet must not rise to 10°C higher than the temperature
outside the cabinet.
2. A closed control cabinet must be configured with a fan (or other air cooling device such as
air conditioner) to ensure air circulation.
3. The air from the fan must not blow directly to the drive unit because this easily causes
dust adhesion and further a fault on the drive unit.
4. A vent must be available at bottom of the control cabinet to form bottom-up air flow, which
prevents heat island effect on the surface of components or partial thermal conductivity
effect.
5. If the fan cannot meet the cooling requirements, install an air conditioner in the cabinet
or in the equipment room. Note that the temperature inside the cabinet must not be too low;
otherwise, condensation may occur, causing short-circuit of components.
6. For special environment where the temperature is high but cannot be reduced effectively,
de-rate the controller during use.

- 35 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

3.2 Electrical Installation

The following figure shows terminal arrangement of the NICE7000.
Figure 3-3 Terminal arrangement of the NICE7000

J9 J4 J5 J6
Operation panel
interface J11

J1

Parallel/Group control MCTC-MCB-W1

communication CN6
interface

PG card
HCB communication
terminal
NICE7000
CTB communication MOD1
CN3
terminal MOD2
CAN1
24 VDC auxiliary CAN2
power output
terminal Keypad
CN1

PRG
DI terminal UP SET

CN2 PE R S T + - BR U V W L1 N
CN4 CN5

Safety door lock Main circuit terminals

DO
input terminal terminal

■■ Main Circuit Wiring

Three-phase AC power supply Three-phase AC power supply

Safety contactor Safety contactor

R S T U V W R S T U V W
BR P
POWER MOTOR POWER MOTOR

Jumper bar

Braking unit MDBUN

Regen. resistor

Regen. resistor

For models of below 37 kW For models of 37 kW and above

- 36 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

■■ Description of Main Circuit Terminals

Table 3-1 Description of main circuit terminals

Terminal Name Description

Three-phase power input
R, S, T Provide three-phase power supply.
terminals
Positive and negative Connect the external braking unit and energy feedback
(+), (-)
terminals of DC bus unit for models of 37 kW and above.
Connect the regen. resistor for models of below 37 kW.
Connect the DC reactor for models of 37 kW and
Terminals for connecting above.
(+), BR (P)
regen. resistor At delivery, the (+) and P terminals are shorted with the
jumper bar. If you need not connect the DC reactor, do
not remove the jumper bar.
Controller output
U, V, W Connect the three-phase motor.
terminals
PE Grounding terminal Must be grounded.
It is the interface for the inverted 220 V power supply to
L1, N EPS interface
the drive control board when the 48 VDC EPS is used.

Precautions about wiring of the main circuit terminals are as follows:

•• Select the regen. resistor according to the recommended values in the regen. resistor
selection table.
•• The circuit on the output side must not be short-circuited or grounded.
•• U, V, W cables of the controller must run through the grounding metal pipe and be laid
separately or vertically with the control circuit signal cable.
•• If the motor cable is too long, electrical resonance will be generated due to the impact
of distributed capacitance, thus damaging the motor insulation or generating higher
leakage current, causing the controller to trip in overcurrent protection.
•• The requirements for the PE conductor are as follows:
-- The grounding terminal of the main circuit must be tied to ground reliably, with the
grounding resistance smaller than 0.1 Ω.
-- The impedance of the PE conductor/cable must be able to bear the probable maximum
short-circuit current when a fault occurs.
-- Use a yellow/green cable as the PE conductor.
-- Select the size of the PE conductor according to the following table.

Cross-sectional Area of a Phase Min. Cross-sectional Area of

Conductor (S) Protective Conductor (Sp)
S ≤ 16 mm2 S
16 mm < S ≤ 35 mm
2 2
16 mm2
35 mm2 < S S/2

- 37 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

■■ Description of Control Circuit Terminals

Table 3-2 Description of control circuit terminals

Terminal
Mark Code Terminal Name Function Description
Arrangement
CN1
X1
X2
Optocoupler isolation X3
Input voltage range: 10–30 VDC X4
CN1 X1 to X12 X5
Input impedance: 4.7 kΩ X6
DI Input current limit: 5 mA X7
X8
Functions set in F5-01 to F5-20, X9
slow-down switch connected to a X10

terminal among X1 to X8 CN2

X13 to X20 X13
X14
X15
X16
CN2 AI X17
Input voltage range: -10 to 10 VDC X18
AI X19
Used for the analog load cell device X20
M M
AI

24 VDC power supply for the MCB,

24 VDC power
+24V//MCM used for the input, output, and
supply
communication circuits CN3
M24
Modbus MCM
Mod1+/ Mod1+
CN3 communication HCB serial communication terminal
Mod1- Mod1-
terminal CAN1+
CAN1+
CANbus
CAN1+/
communication CTB CAN communication terminal
CAN1-
terminal
Normally-open (NO), maximum
Y7/Y8/Y9/ current and voltage rating: 5 A, 250
Relay output VAC
YM
Function set in F5-38 and F5-40 CN4
Y5 M5 Y6 M6
CN4
Safety circuit and door lock circuit X29 X30 X31 XCOM
X29,
higher-voltage input terminals
X30, DI
Input voltage range: 95–125 VAC
X31-XCOM
Function set in F5-29 to F5-31
Normally-open (NO), maximum
CN5
Y1-M1 to current and voltage rating: 5 A, 250
CN5 Relay output Y1 M1 Y2 M2 Y3 M3
Y6-M6 VAC
Y3 M3 Y4 M4 Y6 M6
Function set in F5-32 to F5-37

- 38 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Terminal
Mark Code Terminal Name Function Description
Arrangement

Same as terminals X1 to X20,

X21-X28 Digital input
function set in F5-21 to F5-28
CN6
X21
24 VDC power supply for parallel/ X22
24 VDC power X23
+24V/MCM group control, and second
supply X24
communication circuit X25
X26
CN6 X27
Modbus X28
Mod2+/ Used for remote monitoring or W24
communication WCM
Mod2- standby hall call MOD2+
terminal MOD2-
CAN2+
CAN2-
CANbus
CAN2+/ CAN communication for parallel/
communication
CAN2- group control
terminal

Table 3-3 Description of indicators on the MCB

Mark Terminal Name Function Description

Standby
This indicator blinks (green) when the communication is
Mod2 communication
normal.
indicator
Standby This indicator is steady on (green) when communication
CAN2 communication for parallel/group control is normal, and blinks when the
indicator running in parallel/group mode is normal.
HCB communication When communication between the MCB and the HCB is
Mod1
indicator normal, this indicator is on (green).
CTB communication When communication between the MCB and the CTB is
CAN1
indicator normal, this indicator is on (green).
X1 to X28 Input signal indicator This indicator is on when the external input is active.
Y1 to Y9 Output signal indicator This indicator is on when the system output is active.

Note

Do not short J6 during normal use. Other jumpers are used for updating programs, and do not
short them if unnecessary.

3.3 CTB Board (MCTC-CTB)

3.3.1 Dimensions and Installation

The car top board (MCTC-CTB) is the elevator car control board of the NICE7000. It
consists of 8 DI terminals, 1 AI terminal, and 9 relay output terminals (standard: 7). It
communicates with the MCTC-CCB and MCTC-HCB through Modbus.
The following figure shows the appearance and structure and installation method of the
CTB.

- 39 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

Figure 3-4 Appearance, structure and installation method of the CTB

C3
DM
D2
D1

C2
C1
CM
C3M

B3
B1
B2
BM

AM
B
A
Φ4.9
CN4 CN5
D2 D1 C3 C2 C1 B3 B2 B1 A1
CN10
J2 J9
ON OFF

CAN

125
115
CN7
RESET
MCTC-CTB

CN8

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
CN2 CN1 CN6 CN3

MOD+
CAN+

MOD-
CAN-

COM
COM
24V

P24
24V

P24
24V

X1
X2
X3

X5
X7
X8
X6
X4
Ai
M
152
162 Unit: mm

Vertical installation Horizontal installation

1

2 2
MCTC-CTB
MCTC-CTB

3 1

1 - Plastic support higher than 1 cm

2 - Self-tapping screw 4-φ4.9x30
3 - Fixing backplane
4 - Car top control box

3.3.2 Wiring of CTB Terminals

Table 3-4 Wiring description of CTB terminals

Terminal
Mark Terminal Name Function Description
Arrangement
External 24 VDC 24 VDC power supply for the
+24V/COM
power supply entire CTB 24V
CAN+ CN2
CN2 CANbus CAN-
Connecting the MCB for COM
CAN+/CAN- communication
CANbus communication
interface
24 VDC power 24 VDC power supply for the
+24V/COM 24V
supply HCB MOD+
CN1 MOD-
CN1
MOD+/ Modbus Connecting the HCB for COM
MOD- communication Modbus communication

- 40 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Terminal
Mark Terminal Name Function Description
Arrangement
24V
Load cell signal Ai
CN6 Ai-M 0–10 VDC M CN6
input

24 VDC power
P24 DI common terminal
supply
X1 Light curtain 1
X2 Light curtain 2
X1
X2
X3 Door open limit 1 X3
DI terminal X4
X4 Door open limit 2 P24
CN3 1. Photocoupler isolation, P24 CN3
X5 Door close limit 1 unipolarity input X5
X6
X6 Door close limit 2 2. Input impedance: 3.3 kΩ X7
X8
Full-load signal
X7
(100%)
Overload signal
X8
(110%)
B1-BM Door open signal 1
B2-BM Door close signal 1 BM
B1
B3-BM Forced door close 1 B2
B3
Relay output terminal CM
C1-CM Door open signal 2 C1 CN4
CN4 Contact drive capacity: C2
C2-CM Door close signal 2 C3M
30 VDC, 1 A C3
C3-C3M Forced door close 2 DM
D1
D1-DM Up arrival signal D2

D2-DM Down arrival signal

A-AM (NC Relay output terminal
contact) Car fan and lamp A
CN5 Contact drive capacity: B CN5
B-AM (NO control AM
contact) 250 VAC, 3 A or 30 VDC, 1 A

DB9-pin interface 1 2 3 4 5

CN7/CN8 for communication Connecting the MCTC-CCB 6 7 8 9

with the CCB

CN7/CN8

Connecting the external

CN10 RJ45 interface CN10
operation panel
Setting the CTB addresses:
Short OFF or do not connect
CTB address the terminal for a single
J2 jumper in parallel elevator and master elevator J2
ON OFF
control in parallel control. Short ON for
the slave elevator in parallel
control.

- 41 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

Terminal
Mark Terminal Name Function Description
Arrangement
This indicator blinks when
CANbus communication between the
CAN communication CTB and the MCB is normal,
indicator and is steady on when a
communication fault occurs.
CAN
This indicator blinks and RESET
the CANbus communication
CANbus
indicator is steady on
RESET communication fault
when a fault occurs during
indicator
communication between the
CTB and the MCB.

This indicator is on (green) X1 X2 X3 X4

X1 to X8 DI indicator when the external input is
active.
X5 X6 X7 X8

A1, B1 to B3, C1 to This indicator is on (green)

Relay output D2 D1 C3 C2
C3, when the system output is
indicator
D1 to D2 active. C1 B3 B2 B1 A1

It is factory reserved. Do not

short it randomly. Otherwise,
J9 Reserved -
the controller may not be used
properly.

Note

•• To prevent external interference on communication, you are advised to use the shielded twisted
pair as communication cables and lay them parallel.
•• Connect cables to the terminals according to the terminal marks, and fix the cables.

3.4 Display Board (MCTC-HCB)

As an important interface between users and the control system, the MCTC-HCB receives
hall calls and displays the current floor and running direction for the hall. This board can also
be used as car display board.
Monarch provides many types of display boards. The following part describes only a
few common types. If the types available cannot meet your requirements, you can use a
parallel-serial conversion board (HCB-B) to make the board provided match your own. For
any further requirement, contact us.
The common types to be described are listed in the following table.

- 42 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Table 3-5 Common HCB types

Type Description Size (mm)

MCTC-HCB-H Dot-matrix display board (red) 144 x 70 x 18
MCTC-HCB-R1 Ultrathin dot-matrix display board (red) 144 x 70 x 10
Ultrathin segment LCD display board (blue background
MCTC-HCB-D2 144 x 70 x 10
white display)
Ultrathin segment LCD display board (black background
MCTC-HCB-D5 136.5 x 76 x 9.3
white display)
4.3-inch segment LCD display board (blue background
MCTC-HCB-U1 143.5 x 79.2 x 9.4
white display)
6.4-inch segment LCD display board (blue background
MCTC-HCB-V1 131 x 184.6 x 14.2
white display)
MCTC-HCB-B No-display hall call board 70 x 84 x 20

3.4.1 MCTC-HCB-H (Dot-Matrix Display Board)

Figure 3-5 Appearance, dimensions, and installation method of HCB-H

22.9

4-Φ4.2 2
1
39.1

MCTC-HCB-H

MCTC-HCB-H
134.0

144.0

JP1 JP2
22.9

JP3 JP4
DOWN 9.9
UP 34.3
22.5
CN
S1 1
56.0
Unit: mm 1 - Plastic support higher than 1 cm
70.0
2 - Self-tapping screw 4-φ4.9x30

The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-H.

- 43 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

Table 3-6 Input and output terminals of HCB-H

Terminal
Function Terminal Wiring
Name
Up arrival
indicator

Interface for the elevator lock switch and up

arrival indicator Elevator
lock switch
JP1 Pins 2 and 3 are for switch input. Pins 1 and 4 input
are output of the up arrival indicator (24 VDC
output, load capacity: 40 mA).

1234
Down arrival
indicator

Interface for the fire emergency switch and down

arrival indicator Fire
emergency
JP2 Pins 2 and 3 are for switch input. Pins 1 and 4 switch input
are output of the down arrival indicator (24 VDC
output, load capacity: 40 mA).

1234
Up call indicator

Interface for the up call button and indicator

Up call
JP3 Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 button
are power supply for the up call indicator (24
VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
1234

Down call indicator

Interface for the down call button and indicator

Down call
JP4 Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 button
are power supply for the down call indicator (24
VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
1234

Button for setting the floor address.

Hold down the button to adjust the floor address
S1 (range 0–56). After you stop pressing, the S1
address number blinks three times and the
setting is successful.
MOD+

Modbus communication and power supply

MOD-
COM
24V

terminal
CN1
Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication.
Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply. 1234

- 44 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

3.4.2 MCTC-HCB-R1 (Ultrathin Dot-Matrix Display Board)

Figure 3-6 Appearance, dimensions, and installation method of HCB-R1

4-Φ3.5

2
1

39.0

MCTC-HCB-R1
22.8

144.0
134.0
MCTC-HCB-R1

10
CN1 UP DOWNST XF 6.7
J1

56.0 1 - Plastic support higher than 1 cm

Unit: mm
70 2 - Self-tapping screw 4-φ4.9x30

The following table describes the input and output terminals.

Table 3-7 Input and output terminals of HCB-R1

Terminal
Function Terminal Wiring
Name
Up call indicator

Interface for the up call button and indicator

Up call
UP Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power button
supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output, load
capacity: 40 mA).
1234

Down call indicator

Interface for the down call button and indicator

Down call
DOWN Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 are button
power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC output,
load capacity: 40 mA).
1234

Interface for the fire emergency and elevator lock Elevator Fire
lock emergency
switches input input
XF/ST
Pins 1 and 2 are for elevator lock input. Pins 3 and 4 are
for fire emergency input.
1234

Terminal for setting the floor address.

J1 Short J1, and press the UP button or DOWN button to J1
set the floor address (range 0–56). After the jumper cap
is removed, the address is automatically stored.

- 45 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

Terminal
Function Terminal Wiring
Name

MOD+
MOD-
COM
24V
Modbus communication and power supply terminal
CN1 Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. Pins 1 and
4 are for DC power supply.
1234

3.4.3 MCTC-HCB-D2 (Ultrathin Segment LCD Display Board)

Figure 3-7 Appearance, dimensions, and installation method of HCB-D2

4-Φ3.5

2
1

MCTC-HCB-D2
134.0
144.0
76.0

49

56.0
DOW
CN1 UP ST XF 10
J1 N

70.0 Unit: mm 1 - Plastic support higher than 1 cm

2 - Self-tapping screw 4-φ4.9x30

The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-D2.
Table 3-8 Input and output terminals of HCB-D2

Terminal
Function Terminal Wiring
Name
Up call indicator

Interface for the up call button and indicator

Up call
UP Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power button
supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output, load
capacity: 40 mA).
1234
Down call indicator

Interface for the down call button and indicator

Down call
DOWN Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 are button
power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC output,
load capacity: 40 mA).
1234

- 46 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Terminal
Function Terminal Wiring
Name

Elevator Fire
Interface for the fire emergency and elevator lock switch lock input emergency
input
XF/ST Pins 1 and 2 are for elevator lock input. Pins 3 and 4 are
for fire emergency input.
1234

Terminal for setting the floor address

J1 Short J1, and press the UP button or DOWN button to set J1
the floor address (range 0–56). After the jumper cap is
removed, the address is automatically stored.

MOD+
MOD-
COM
24V
Modbus communication and power supply terminal
CN1 Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication.
Pins 1 and 4 are for power supply. 1234

3.4.4 MCTC-HCB-D5 (Ultrathin Segment LCD Display Board)

Figure 3-8 Appearance, dimensions, and installation method of HCB-D5

76
9.3
60

53.5

1
136.5
MCTC-HCB-D5

MCTC-HCB-D5
118

91.5

4-φ4.5

JP2 CN1 JP1 JP3

1 - 4-M4x18 screw

- 47 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-D5.
Table 3-9 Input and output terminals of HCB-D5

Terminal
Function Terminal Wiring
Name
Up call indicator

Interface for the up call button and indicator

Up call
JP2 Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 are button
power supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output,
load capacity: 40 mA).
1234
Down call indicator

Interface for the down call button and indicator

Down call
JP3 Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 button
are power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC
output, load capacity: 40 mA).
1234

Interface for the fire emergency and elevator lock Elevator Fire
emergency
lock input
switch input
JP1
Pins 1 and 2 are for elevator lock input. Pins 3 and 4
are for fire emergency input.
1234

Button for setting the floor address.

S1 Hold down the button to adjust the floor address (range S1
0–56). After you stop pressing, the address number
blinks three times and the setting is successful.
MOD+
MOD-

Modbus communication and power supply terminal.

COM
24V

CN1 Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication.

Pins 1 and 4 are for power supply. 1234

- 48 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

3.4.5 MCTC-HCB-U1 (4.3-inch Segment LCD Display Board)

Figure 3-9 Appearance, dimensions, and installation method of HCB-U1

3-5.5

3-4.5
Φ4.5
2
1
53.0

MCTC-HCB-U1
118.0
143.5
92.0
15

9.4
60.0 Unit: mm

Unit: mm 1 - Plastic support higher than 1 cm

79.2
2 - Self-tapping screw 4-φ4.9x30

The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-U1.
Table 3-10 Input and output terminals of HCB-U1

Terminal
Function Terminal Wiring
Name
Up call indicator

Interface for the up call button and indicator

Up call
J1 Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 button
are power supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC
output, load capacity: 40 mA).
1234

Down call indicator

Interface for the down call button and indicator

Down call
J2 Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 button
are power supply for the down call indicator (24
VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
1234

Interface for the fire emergency and elevator lock Elevator Fire
emergency
lock input
switches input
J3
Pins 1 and 2 are for elevator lock input. Pins 3 and
4 are for fire emergency input.
1234

- 49 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

Terminal
Function Terminal Wiring
Name
Button for setting the floor address.
Hold down the button to adjust the floor address
S1 (range: 0−56). After you stop pressing, the address S1
number blinks three times, and therefore the setting
is successful.

MOD+
MOD-
Modbus communication and power supply terminal

COM
24V
CN1 Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. Pins 1
and 4 are for DC power supply. 1234

3.4.6 MCTC-HCB-V1 (6.4-inch Segment LCD Display Board)

Figure 3-10 Appearance, dimensions, and installation method of HCB-V1

Φ4.5 2
105 1
95

MCTC-HCB-V1
184.6
160
135

14.2

17.9

131 1 - Plastic support higher than 1 cm

Unit: mm 2 - Self-tapping screw 4-φ4.9x30

The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-V1.
Table 3-11 Input and output terminals of HCB-V1

Terminal
Function Terminal Wiring
Name
Up call indicator

Interface for the up call button and indicator

Up call
J1 Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 are button
power supply for the up call indicator (24 VDC output,
load capacity: 40 mA).
1234

- 50 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Terminal
Function Terminal Wiring
Name
Down call indicator

Interface for the down call button and indicator

Down call
J2 Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 button
are power supply for the down call indicator (24 VDC
output, load capacity: 40 mA).
1234

Interface for the fire emergency and elevator lock Elevator Fire
lock emergency
switch input input
J3
Pins 1 and 2 are for elevator lock input. Pins 3 and 4
are for fire emergency input.
1234

Button for setting the floor address.

Hold down the button to adjust the floor address
S1 (range: 0−56). After you stop pressing, the address S1
number blinks three times, and therefore the setting is
successful.

MOD+
MOD-
COM
24V
Modbus communication and power supply terminal
CN1 Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. Pins 1
and 4 are for DC power supply.
1234

3.4.7 MCTC-HCB-B (No Display Hall Call Board)

Figure 3-11 Appearance, dimensions, and installation method of HCB-B

CN2 CN3
2
1
MCTC-HCB-B

K1 K2 K3 K4

MCTC-HCB-B
62.7
84.5

JP1 JP2

JP3 JP4

JP5 JP6
8.8
24V MOD+ MOD-COM 4-
φ4
JP3=UP JP4=DOWN .5 26.4

56.1
Unit: mm
70.1
1 - Plastic support higher than 1 cm
2 - Combination screw M4x10

The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-B.

- 51 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

Table 3-12 Input and output terminals of HCB-B

Terminal
Function Terminal Wiring
Name
Elevator lock indicator

Interface for the elevator lock switch Elevator

JP1 Pins 2 and 3 are for switch input. Pins 1 and 4 are for lock button

output of the elevator lock indicator.

1234

Fire emergency indicator

Interface for the fire emergency switch Fire emergency

JP2 Pins 2 and 3 are for switch input. Pins 1 and 4 are for button

output of the fire emergency indicator.

1234

Up call indicator

Interface for the up call button and indicator

Up call button
JP3 Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power
supply for the up call indicator.
1234

Down call indicator

Interface for the down call button and indicator Down call
button
JP4 Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 are
power supply for the down call indicator.
1234

Disability up call
indicator

Interface for the disability up call button and indicator

Disability up
JP5 Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Pins 1 and 4 are power call button
supply for the up call indicator.

1234
Disability down call
indicator

Interface for the disability down call button and indicator

Disability down
JP6 Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Pins 1 and 4 are call button
power supply for the down call indicator.

1234
MOD+
MOD-

Modbus communication and power supply terminal

COM
24V

CN1 Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. Pins 1 and

4 are for DC power supply. 1234

Relay output BM B2 B1 AM A2 A1 CN2

CN2
For the definition of the pins, see Table 3-13. 6 5 4 3 2 1

- 52 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

The HCB-B provides four relay outputs, K1, K2, K3, and K4, provided by CN2 terminals.
Table 3-13 Relay output and pin definition of CN2

Relay CN2 Pin Common Function Description

K1 A1 AM Up arrival indicator
K2 A2 AM Down arrival indicator
K3 B1 BM Up arrival gong
K4 B2 BM Down arrival gong

The DIP switch S1 is used to set the floor address of the HCB-B, as described in the
following table.
Table 3-14 Floor address setting by S1

S1 Floor Address Setting, Range: 0–63

S1.1 Floor address selection Bit0
S1.2 Floor address selection Bit1
S1.3 Floor address selection Bit2
S1.4 Floor address selection Bit3
S1.5 Floor address selection Bit4
S1.6 Floor address selection Bit5

The DIP switch S2 is used to select the function of the HCB-B, as described in the following
table.
Table 3-15 S2 description

S2 Function
S2.1 Modbus termination resistor setting
S2.2 HCB-B function selection
S2.3 HCB-B function selection
S2.4 For test
S2.5 HCB-B function selection
S2.6 HCB-B function selection

The HCB-B provides nine functions, which can be set according to the following table.
Table 3-16 Function setting of the HCB-B

HCB-B Function S2.6 S2.5 S2.3 S2.2

1. HCB-B function OFF OFF ON OFF
2. Binary output OFF OFF OFF ON
3. 7-segment function OFF OFF OFF OFF

- 53 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

HCB-B Function S2.6 S2.5 S2.3 S2.2

4. BCD output OFF ON OFF OFF

5. Binary output with letter OFF ON OFF ON

6. Disability function output OFF ON ON OFF

7. In-car extension output OFF ON ON ON

8. In-car output based on

ON OFF OFF ON
physical floor (binary output)
9. Indication by hall arrival
ON OFF OFF OFF
gong and indicator

3.5 CCB Board (MCTC-CCB)

The car call board (MCTC-CCB) is another interface between users and the control
system. Each CCB comprises 24 inputs and 22 outputs, including 16 floor buttons and 8
functional signals. The CCB mainly collects button calls and outputs signals of the button
call indicators. The need for 31-floor use can be implemented through cascaded connection.
CN2 is an input connector and CN1 is a cascaded output connector.
Figure 3-12 Appearance, dimensions, and installation method of the CCB
79
69

CN2
2
Buzzer 1
MCTC-CCB

JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Floor 1 Floor 2 Floor 3 Floor 4

MCTC-CCB

JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Floor 5 Floor 6 Floor 7 Floor 8

148
158

JP9 JP10 JP11 JP12

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Floor 9 Floor 10 Floor 11 Floor 12

JP13 JP14 JP15 JP16

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Floor 13 Floor 14 Floor 15 Floor 16

JP17 JP18 JP19 JP20

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Door Door Door open Direct
open close delay travel ride
JP21 JP22 JP23 JP24
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Attendant Direction Independent Fire
change running emergency
R2.5
CN1

Unit: mm 1 - Plastic support higher than 1 cm

2 - Self-tapping screw 4-φ4.9x30

The following table describes the input and output terminals of the CCB.

- 54 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Table 3-17 Input and output terminals of the CCB

No. Interface Pins 2 and 3 Pins 1 and 4 Remarks

1 JP1 Floor 1 button input Floor 1 display output
2 JP2 Floor 2 button input Floor 2 display output
3 JP3 Floor 3 button input Floor 3 display output
4 JP4 Floor 4 button input Floor 4 display output
Floor button indicator
5 JP5 Floor 5 button input Floor 5 display output
6 JP6 Floor 6 button input Floor 6 display output
Floor
7 JP7 Floor 7 button input Floor 7 display output button

8 JP8 Floor 8 button input Floor 8 display output

9 JP9 Floor 9 button input Floor 9 display output
1234
10 JP10 Floor 10 button input Floor 10 display output
11 JP11 Floor 11 button input Floor 11 display output For CCB2, the input
signal of JPn corresponds
12 JP12 Floor 12 button input Floor 12 display output to floor (16+n) button
13 JP13 Floor 13 button input Floor 13 display output input.

14 JP14 Floor 14 button input Floor 14 display output

15 JP15 Floor 15 button input Floor 15 display output
16 JP16 Floor 16 button input Floor 16 display output
Door open display
17 JP17 Door open button input
output
Door close display
18 JP18 Door close button input
output
Door open delay button Door open delay display
19 JP19
input output
Non-door zone stop Invalid for CCB2.
20 JP20 Direct travel ride input
output
21 JP21 Attendant input Reserved
22 JP22 Direction change input Reserved
Independent running
23 JP23 Reserved
input
24 JP24 Fire emergency input Reserved
Note: Pins 1 and 2 are positive of power supply. The pin with white dot mark or that is
rectangular is pin 1.

Note

•• Perform wiring strictly according to the terminal marks and ensure that the button is inserted
securely.
•• The MCTC-CCB has the same interfaces on both ends, and do not make wrong connection
when connecting multiple boards in series.

- 55 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

3.6 Selection and Use of the MCTC-PG Card

The NICE7000 can implement CLVC only with use of the MCTC-PG card. The following
figures show the appearance of the MCTC-PG card and its installation on the controller.
Directly insert the J1 terminal of the MCTC-PG card into the J12 terminal of the controller.
Figure 3-13 Appearance of the MCTC-PG card and its installation on the controller

NICE7000

J12

MCTC-PG

3.6.1 Selection of the MCTC-PG Card

Monarch provides four PG card models, MCTC-PG-A2, MCTC-PG-D, MCTC-PG-E and

MCTC-PG-F1 for different encoder types, as described in the following table.
Table 3-18 Selection of the MCTC-PG card models

Encoder Type Adaptable PG Card Appearance

Push-pull encoder 12V

PGM CN1 MCTC-PG-A2

Open-collector incremental MCTC-PG-A2 PGA
J1

encoder PGB

CN2
M AI

MCTC-PG-D
CN1
UVW encoder MCTC-PG-D D2
D5
J1

D8
D11
D14

- 56 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Encoder Type Adaptable PG Card Appearance

CN1 MCTC-PG-E J1
SIN/COS encoder MCTC-PG-E

Absolute encoder CN1 MCTC-PG-F1 J1

MCTC-PG-F1
(ECN413/1313)

3.6.2 Terminal Wiring and Description of the MCTC-PG Card

The MCTC-PG card is connected to the controller and the encoder as follows:
The J1 terminal and CN1 terminal of the MCTC-PG card are respectively connected to the
J12 terminal of the MCB on the controller and the encoder of the motor.
Different MCTC-PG card models are connected to the MCB in the same way. The
connection method to the encoder depends on the CN1 terminal of the model.
The following figure shows the wiring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller.
Figure 3-14 Wring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller
Regen. resistor

Safety
contactor
R + – BR Motor Encoder
Three-phase AC U
power supply S
V M
T
W
NICE7000

J1 CN1
MCTC-PG-E

PG card

The following table defines the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models.

- 57 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

Table 3-19 Definitions of the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models

MCTC-
MCTC-PG-D MCTC-PG-E MCTC-PG-F1
PG-A2
1 15V 1 A+ 6 NC 11 W+ 1 B- 6 A- 11 C- 1 B- 6 A- 11 CLK-

2 PGM 2 A- 7 U+ 12 W- 2 NC 7 COM 12 D+ 2 NC 7 GND 12 DATA+

3 PGA 3 B+ 8 U- 13 VCC 3 Z+ 8 B+ 13 D- 3 NC 8 B+ 13 DATA-

5V
4 PGB 4 B- 9 V+ 14 COM 4 Z- 9 VCC 14 NC 4 NC 9 14 NC
(Up)

5V
5 NC 10 V- 15 NC 5 A+ 10 C+ 15 NC 5 A+ 10 CLK+ 15
(Sensor)

6
1 11
7
2 12
8
3 13
9
4 14
10
5 15
6 6
12V 1 11 1 11
7 7
2 12 2 12
PGM 8 8
3 13 3 13
PGA 9 9 CN1
4 14 4 14
10 10 M5V Green brown
PGB 1b 9
5 15 5 15 U5V Blue
6a 15
A+ Green dark
CN1 2a 5
A- Yellow dark
5b 6
B+ Blue dark
MCTC-PG-F1

Encoder 4a 8
B- Red dark
CN1 CN1 3b 1
CK+ Purple
2b 10
CK- Yellow
5a 11
DT+ Grey
6b 12
DT- Pink
1a 13
GND Green white
4b 7
3a

- 58 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

3.6.3 Precautions on Connecting the MCTC-PG Card

1. The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must be separated from the cables of
the control circuit and the power circuit. Parallel cabling in close distance is forbidden.
2. The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must be a shielded cable. The shield
must be connected to the PE on the controller side. To minimize interference, single-end
grounding is suggested.
3. The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must run through the duct separately
and the metal shell is reliably grounded.

3.7 Selection of Braking Components

The NICE7000 models of 30 kW and below have a built-in braking unit, and you only need
to connect an external regen. resistor between BR and + terminals. For models above 30
kW, you need to install a braking unit and a regen. resistor externally.
Select the regen. resistor based on the configuration listed in the following table.
Table 3-20 Brakingresistor selection for the NICE7000 models

Power of
Power of Max. Min.
Regen.
Controller Model Adaptable Resistor Resistance Braking Unit
Resistor
Motor (kW) (Ω) (Ω)
(W)
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20% (de-rated)
NICE-LQX-2002-A/B/C0 1.1 145.0 125.0 300
NICE-LQX-2003-A/B/C0 1.5 105.0 90.0 450
220-NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 2.2 72.0 63.0 600
220-NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 3.7 43.0 37.0 1100
Built-in
220-NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 4.0 40.0 35.0 1200
220-NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 5.5 29.0 25.0 1600
220-NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 11.0 18.0 16.0 3500
220-NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 15.0 13.0 13.0 4500
Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-LQX-2002-A/B/C0 2.2 72.0 65.0 600
NICE-LQX-2003-A/B/C0 3.7 54.0 50.0 1100
220-NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 4.0 40.0 35.0 1200
220-NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 5.5 29.0 25.0 1600
Built-in
220-NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 7.5 26.0 22.0 2500
220-NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 11.0 14.5 13.0 3500
220-NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 15.0 13.0 12.5 4500
220-NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 18.5 12.5 12.0 5500
220-NICE-LQX-4037-A/B/C0 22.0 7.5 6.0 6500 MDBUN-60-2T
220-NICE-LQX-4045-A/B/C0 30.0 5.5 4.5 9000 MDBUN-90-2T

- 59 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

Power of
Power of Max. Min.
Regen.
Controller Model Adaptable Resistor Resistance Braking Unit
Resistor
Motor (kW) (Ω) (Ω)
(W)
MDBUN-60-2T x
220-NICE-LQX-4055-A/B/C0 37.0 4.5 3.5 11000
2
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-LQX-4002-A/B/C0 2.2 290 230 600
NICE-LQX-4003-A/B/C0 3.7 170 135 1100
NICE-LQX-4005-A/B/C0 5.5 115 90 1600
NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 7.5 85 65 2500
NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 11 55 43 3500 Built-in
NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 15 43 35 4500
NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 18.5 34.0 25 5500
NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 22 24 22 6500
NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 30 20 16 9000
NICE-LQX-4037-A/B/C0 37 16.0 13 11000 MDBUN-60-T
NICE-LQX-4045-A/B/C0 45 14.0 11 13500 MDBUN-60-T
NICE-LQX-4055-A/B/C0 55 12.0 10 16500 MDBUN-90-T
NICE-LQX-4075-A/B/C0 75 16 x 2 14 x 2 12000 x 2 MDBUN-60-T x 2
NICE-LQX-4090-A/B/C0 90 14 x 2 13 x 2 13500 x 2 MDBUN-60-T x 2
NICE-LQX-4110-A/B/C0 110 12 x 2 9x2 18000 x 2 MDBUN-90-T x 2
NICE-LQX-4132-A/B/C0 132 13.5 x 3 10.5 x 3 14000 x 3 MDBUN-90-T x 3
NICE-LQX-4160-A/B/C0 160 12 x 3 9x3 18000 x 3 MDBUN-90-T x 3

Note

•• The preceding configuration takes the synchronous motor as an example. The asynchronous
motor has poor energy transfer efficiency, and you can reduce the power of the regen. resistor
or increase the resistance of the regen. resistor.
•• It is recommended that you select the regen. resistor closest to the minimum resistance.
•• "x 2" indicates that two sets are required. Take NICE-LQX-4110 as an example: "9 x 2, 18000
x 2, MDBUN-90-T x 2" indicates that two sets of (9 Ω, 18000 W) regen. resistor + MDBUN-
90-T braking unit are connected in parallel to the controller. "x 3" indicates that three sets are
required.

- 60 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

3.8 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices

3.8.1 Connection to Peripheral Electrical Devices

Three-phase AC Use within the allowable power

power supply supply specification of the
controller.

Select a proper breaker to resist

Moulded case circuit breaker large in-rush current that flows into
(MCCB) or earth leakage the controller at power-on.
External operation panel
circuit breaker (ELCB)
To guarantee safety, use an RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC

electromagnetic contactor. Do not

use it to start or stop the controller
Electromagnetic
Hz A V
RPM %

because such operation reduces

contactor
PRG ENTER

the service life of the controller. QUICK

RUN MF.K
STOP

RES

Suppress the high order harmonic Voice

to improve the power factor. announcer
AC input reactor

Noise filter NICE7000

on input side
Car display
Reduce the MCTC-CTB board
electromagnetic
interference on the
input side.

RST UV W
MCTC-CCB

MCTC-HCB
Ground
Top floor
Ground
Reliably ground the
motor and the
controller to prevent
electric shock.
Output
reactor

Braking unit

MCTC-HCB
Bottom floor

Regen. resistor +
-
BR Motor

P(+)
Ground

1. Do not install the capacitor or surge suppressor on the output side of the controller.
Otherwise, it may cause faults to the controller or damage to the capacitor and surge
suppressor.
2. Inputs/Outputs (main circuit) of the controller contain harmonics, which may interfere
with the communication device connected to the controller. Therefore, install an anti-
interference filter to minimize the interference.
3. Select the peripheral devices based on actual applications as well as by referring to
section 3.8.2.
The following table describes the peripheral electrical devices.

- 61 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

Table 3-21 Description of peripheral electrical devices

Part Mounting Location Function Description

Circuit Forefront of controller Cut off the power supply of the controller and provide
breaker power input side short-circuit protection.

Between circuit breaker Apply/Cut off the power supply of the controller.
Safety
and the controller input The close/open of the contactor is controlled by the
contactor
side external safety circuit.
Improve the power factor of the input side.
Eliminate the higher harmonics on the input side to
AC input
Controller input side provide effective protection on the rectifier bridge.
reactor
Eliminate the input current unbalance due to unbalance
between the power phases.
Between the controller
AC output output side and the If the distance between the controller and the motor is
reactor motor, close to the greater than 100 m, install an AC output reactor.
controller

3.8.2 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices

Proper cable specification and cabling greatly improves anti-interference capability and
safety of the system, facilitating installation and commissioning and enhancing system
running stability.
The following table describes the specifications of peripheral electrical devices for selection.
Table 3-22 Specification of peripheral electrical devices for selection

Cable of Grounding
MCCB Contactor Cable of Main Cable
Controller Model Control
(A) (A) Circuit (mm²)
Circuit (mm²) (mm²)
Single-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-LQX-2002-A/B/C0 16 12 1 0.75 1
NICE-LQX-2003-A/B/C0 20 18 2.5 0.75 2.5
220-NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 25 18 4 0.75 4
220-NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 40 25 6 0.75 6
220-NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 50 32 6 0.75 6
220-NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 50 38 6 0.75 6
220-NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 63 50 10 0.75 10
220-NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 80 65 16 0.75 16
Three-phase 220 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-LQX-2002-A/B/C0 16 12 1.5 0.75 1.5
NICE-LQX-2003-A/B/C0 25 18 2.5 0.75 2.5
220-NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 32 25 4 0.75 4

- 62 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Cable of Grounding
MCCB Contactor Cable of Main Cable
Controller Model Control
(A) (A) Circuit (mm²)
Circuit (mm²) (mm²)
220-NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 40 32 6 0.75 6
220-NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 50 38 6 0.75 6
220-NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 63 40 10 0.75 10
220-NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 80 50 10 0.75 10
220-NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 100 65 16 0.75 16
Three-phase 380 V, range: -15% to 20%
NICE-LQX-4002-A/B/C0 10 9 0.75 0.75 0.75
NICE-LQX-4003-A/B/C0 16 12 1.5 0.75 1.5
NICE-LQX-4005-A/B/C0 25 18 2.5 0.75 2.5
NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 32 25 4 0.75 4
NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 40 32 6 0.75 6
NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 50 38 6 0.75 6
NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 63 40 10 0.75 10
NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 80 50 10 0.75 10
NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 100 65 16 0.75 16
NICE-LQX-4037-A/B/C0 100 80 25 0.75 16
NICE-LQX-4045-A/B/C0 160 95 35 0.75 16

Note

To prevent the strong power from interfering with the weak power, the strong-power cables must
be separated from the weak-power cables during cabling in the shaft. Grounding cables must be
used to separate strong-power and weak-power traveling cables. "Strong power" refers to the
voltage of 36 V and above.
The PVC insulation copper lead cable is recommended under 40C ambient temperature in
steady state.

3.9 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE7000 Control System

Figure 3-15 Electrical wiring diagram of the NICE7000 control system

See the last page of this chapter.

3.10 Installation of Shaft Position Signals

In elevator control, to implement landing accurately and running safely, the car position
needs to be identified based on shaft position signals.
These shaft position signals include the leveling switches, up/down slow-down switches, up/
down limit switches, and up/down final limit switches.
These shaft position signals are directly transmitted by the shaft cables to the MCB of the

- 63 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

controller. For the electrical wiring method, refer to Figure 3-15.

The following figure shows the arrangement of shaft position signals in the shaft.
Figure 3-16 Arrangement of shaft position signals
Up final limit
switch

150 mm
Up limit
switch
30-50 mm
Top leveling
position

V²
L L> (V: Rated elevator speed)
2 x F3-08

Up slow-down switch

Leveling plate
D (floor N)
80 ≤ D ≤ 200 mm

Down slow-down switch

V²
L L> (V: Rated elevator speed)
2 x F3-08

Bottom leveling
position
30─50 mm

Down limit
switch 150 mm

Down final
limit switch

- 64 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

3.10.1 Installation of Leveling Signals

Leveling signals comprise the leveling switch and leveling plate and are directly connected
to the input terminal of the controller. It is used to enable the car to land at each floor
accurately.
The leveling switches are generally installed on the top of the car. The NICE7000 system
supports the installation of 1−2 leveling switches. The leveling plate is installed on the guide
rail in the shaft. A leveling plate needs to be installed at each floor. Ensure that leveling
plates at all floors are mounted with the same depth and verticality.
The following figure shows the installation of leveling signals
Figure 3-17 Installation of leveling signals
Leveling
switch

Up leveling signal detection

Door zone signal detection

Leveling
plate
Down leveling signal detection

Car

The following table describes the installation requirements of leveling switches

Table 3-23 Installation requirements of leveling switches

Number of
Connecting to Input Terminals of Setting of
Leveling Installation Method
Controller Function Code
Switches

+24 VDC
F5-01 = 0
Door zone X1
signal X2 F5-02 = 35
X3
Door zone
1 signal detection
+24 VDC
F5-01 = 0
Door zone X1
signal X2 F5-02 = 03
X3

- 65 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

Number of
Connecting to Input Terminals of Setting of
Leveling Installation Method
Controller Function Code
Switches
+24 VDC
F5-01 = 33
Up leveling X1
Up leveling F5-02 = 34
signal detection X2
Down leveling X3
2
Down leveling
+24 VDC
signal detection
Up leveling
F5-01 = 01
X1
X2 F5-02 = 02
Down leveling X3

Note

•• When installing leveling plates, ensure that the plates at all floors are mounted with the same
depth and verticality. Otherwise, the leveling accuracy will be affected. The recommended
length of the plate is 80–200 mm.
•• More leveling input signals need to be added if the door pre-open function is used. In this case,
you need to increase the length of the plate properly. For details on the door pre-open module,
contact the local agent or Monarch.

3.10.2 Installation of Slow-Down Switches

The slow-down switch is one of the key protective components of the NICE7000, protecting
the elevator from over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal at maximum speed
when the elevator position becomes abnormal.
The NICE7000 system supports a maximum of three pairs of slow-down switches. The slow-
down switch 1, slow-down switch 2 and slow-down switch 3 are installed from the two ends
of the shaft to the middle floor one by one. Generally, only one pair of slow-down switches is
required for the low-speed elevator. Two or three pairs of slow-down switches are required
for the high-speed elevator.
The slow-down distance L indicates the distance from the slow-down switch to the leveling
plate at the terminal floor. The calculating formula is as follows:
V²
L>
2 x F3-08

In the formula:
"L" indicates the slow-down distance;
"V" indicates the F0-04 (Rated elevator speed);
"F3-08" indicates the special deceleration rate.
The default value of F3-08 (Special deceleration rate) is 0.9 m/s2. The slow-down distances
calculated based on different rated elevator speeds are listed in the following table:

- 66 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Table 3-24 Slow-down distances based on different rated elevator speeds

Rated
Elevator 0.25 0.4 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 2 2.5 3 3.5 4
Speed (m/s)
Distance of
Slow-down 1 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.7 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
(m)
Distance of
Slow-down 2 None 2.5 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0
(m)
Distance of
Slow-down 3 None 6 8 11
(m)
•• "V" indicates the elevator speed, and precautions on the actual installation distance are as
follows:
•• V < 1 m/s: The actual installation distances of the slow-down switches should be close to the
values recommended in this table.
•• 1 m/s ≤ V ≤ 2 m/s: The actual installation distances of the slow-down switches are allowed to
have an error within ±0.1 m based on the values recommended in this table.
•• 2 m/s < V ≤ 4 m/s: The actual installation distances of the slow-down switches are allowed to
have an error within ±0.3 m based on the values recommended in this table.

Note

•• The slow-down distances above are calculated on the basis of the default special deceleration
rate 0.9 m/s2.
•• Increasing the special deceleration rate does not affect safety. However, decreasing the special
deceleration rate may bring safety hazard. If any change is in need, re-calculate the slow-down
distance by using the above formula.

3.10.3 Installation of Limit Switches

The up limit switch and down limit switch protect the elevator from over travel top/bottom
terminal when the elevator does not stop at the leveling position of the terminal floor.
•• The up limit switch needs to be installed 30−50 mm away from the top leveling position.
The limit switch acts when the car continues to run upward 30−50 mm from the top
leveling position.
•• The down limit switch needs to be installed 30−50 mm away from the bottom leveling
position. The limit switch acts when the car continues to run downward 30−50 mm from
the bottom leveling position.

- 67 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE7000 User Manual

3.10.4 Installation of Final Limit Switches

•• The final limit switch is to protect the elevator from over travel top/bottom terminal when
the elevator does not stop completely upon passing the up/down limit switch.
•• The up final limit switch is mounted above the up limit switch. It is usually 150 mm away
from the top leveling position.
•• The down final limit switch is mounted below the down limit switch. It is usually 150 mm
away from the bottom leveling position.

- 68 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Figure 3-15 Electrical wiring diagram of the NICE7000 control system

Regen. resistor

Safety
contactor
+ – BR K1 Braking Voice
R J9 U Motor mechanism
announcer
Three-phase AC
power supply S K2 MCTC-CHM
V M
SET
T PRG UP
W

Mod+
Mod-
COM
24V
RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC

Switch-mode
Hz A V

Encoder
RPM %

PRG ENTER

power supply
J11
QUICK

(P ≥ 150 W)
STOP
RUN MF.K
RES

Shield
+24 VDC 0V 24V
Up leveling
X1 J12 MCTC-PG
Down leveling
X2 CN10
Up slow-down switch 1
Down slow-down switch 1
X3 CN1 24V 24V
Up slow-down switch 2
X4
X5 CN1 Mod+
Mod-
Mod+
Mod-
Down slow-down switch 2 X6 COM COM
X7
Safety circuit feedback
X8
X9 24V Traveling cable
Door lock circuit feedback X10 COM
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor feedback
X11
X12
CN3 Mod1+
Mod1- 24V
X1
X2
Door 1 light curtain
Door 2 light curtain
CAN1+ CAN+
CAN-
CN2 X3 Door 1 open limit

NICE7000
CAN1- X4 Door 2 open limit
COM P24
CN3 P24
Y1 K1 X5 Door 1 close limit MCTC-HCB
X13 Inspection signal
M1 Top floor MCTC-CTB X6 Door 2 close limit
Inspection Y2
X14 Inspection up X7 Full-load signal
circuit
X15 Inspection down CN5 M2 K2 X8 Overload signal
Up limit Y3
X16 M3
Down limit X17 Y4 CN1
X18 CN2 M4 24V A
Analog load
cell signal
X19
X20
Y5
M5 Mod+ Car lamp/fan B CN5
M Y6
Mod- control AM BM
B1 Control of front door machine
COM
AI M6 B2
X21 B3
24V
X22 Y7
Y8
Wiring for an AI CN6 CM
C1 Control of back door machine
X23
X24 analog load M CN4 C2
Inspection X25 Y9 cell device C3M
X26 YM C3
circuit
X27
X28 CN6 CN4 X29
X30
MCTC-HCB DM
D1
J1
J2 Arrival gong
W24 X31 D2 J3
WCM
MOD2+
MOD2-
XCOM
CN7 CN8
CAN2+
CAN2-
CN1
24V
Mod+
MCTC-HCB Mod-
COM

+24Vdc CN2
NICE7000
CN2
Car top Emergency
inspection electric operation MCB
X13 Inspection signal
Up
Inspection
common X14 Inspection up
Up

Down
X15 Inspection down MCTC-CCB MCTC-CCB
Down

Bottom
Short shaft
safety switches
floor

Note:
MCTC-HCB 24V
The cables for connecting the MCTC-CCB
Mod+ CN1 CN1 are provided by Monarch and the model is
Mod-
COM MCTC-CCL. Specify it in your order.

Cascaded connection

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4
Use of the Commissioning Tools

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools NICE7000 User Manual

Chapter 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools

The NICE7000 supports three commissioning tools, 3-button keypad on the MCB, LED
operation panel, and host computer monitoring software.

Tool Function Description Remark

Onboard 3-button It is used to enter the shaft commissioning commands and
Standard
keypad view floor information.
It is used to view and modify parameters related to elevator
LED operation panel Optional
drive and control.
It is used to monitor the current elevator state, view and
Host computer
modify all parameters, and upload and download parameters Optional
monitoring software
on the PC.

The following part describes the commonly used keypad and LED operation panel in detail.

4.1 Use of the Onboard Keypad

The onboard keypad consists of three 7-segment LEDs and three buttons. You can view
information about the controller and enter simple commands on the keypad.

Note

The keypad is exposed on the controllers of the B0 or C0 structure. Pay attentions to the following
points during use:
1. Wear insulated gloves when performing operations on the keypad to prevent electric shock or
damage to the controller components due to electrostatic discharge.
2. Do not use a metal or sharp tool to press the button to prevent the short-circuit fault or damage
to the components on the MCB.

The following figure shows the appearance of the keypad.

Figure 4-1 Appearance of the keypad

PRG
SET

PRG UP SET

As shown in the preceding figure, the three buttons are PRG, UP, and SET. The functions of
the three buttons are described in the following table.

- 70 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools

Button Function
Press this button in any state to exit the current operation and enter the function menu
PRG
mode (that is, display the current function group number).
Press this button to increase the function group number or data.
UP
In group F6 menu, this button is used to input the door open command.
Enter the function menu edit mode; confirm and save the current operation.
SET
In group F6 menu, this button is used to input the door close command.

The following figure shows the setting of increasing the called floor to 5.
Figure 4-2 Setting the called floor

Current floor Level-I menu

When there is a blinking digit,
(Select the function
(default display) code group) press the UP button to modify it.
PRG UP
01 Switch F0 Increase F1 SET
Enter
Level-II menu
PRG UP SET
(Set the
parameter value) Without 04 Increase 05 Saving
saving

The function code groups displayed on the keypad are described as follows:
1. F0: display of floor and running direction
The F0 menu is displayed on the keypad by default upon power-on. The first LED
indicates the running direction, while the last two LEDs indicate the current floor number
of the elevator.
When the elevator stops, the first LED has no display. When the elevator runs, the first
LED blinks to indicate the running direction.
When a system fault occurs, the 7-segment LEDs automatically display the fault code
and blink. If the fault is reset automatically, the F0 menu is displayed.

Running
direction Current floor

Stop state: no display

RUN state: running direction in blinking
Fault state: fault code in blinking

2. F1: command input of the running floor

After you enter the F1 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the bottom floor (F6-01). You
can press the UP button to set the destination floor within the range of lowest to top and
then press the SET button to save the setting. The elevator runs to the destination floor,
and the display switches over to the F0 menu at the same time.

- 71 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools NICE7000 User Manual

3. F2: fault reset and fault code display

After you enter the F2 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". You can press the UP
button to change the setting to 1 or 2.
Display "1": If you select this value and press the SET button, the system fault is reset.
Then, the display automatically switches over to the F0 menu.
4. Display "2": If you select this value and press the SET button, the 7-segment LEDs
display the 20 fault codes and occurrence time circularly. You can press the PRG button
to exit.
5. F3: time display
After you enter the F3 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the current system time
circularly.
6. F4: contract number display
After you enter the F4 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the user’s contract number.
7. F5: running times display
After you enter the F5 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the elevator running times
circularly.
8. F6: door open/close control
After you enter the F6 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "1-1", and the UP and SET
buttons respectively stand for the door open button and door close button. You can
press the PRG button to exit.
9. F7: shaft auto-tuning command input
After you enter the F7 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". You can select 0 or 1
here, where "1" indicates the shaft auto-tuning command available.
After you select "1" and press the SET button, shaft auto-tuning is implemented if the
conditions are met. Meanwhile, the display switches over to the F0 menu. After shaft
auto-tuning is complete, F7 is back to "0" automatically.
If shaft auto-tuning conditions are not met, fault code "E35" is displayed.
10. F8: test function
After you enter the F8 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". The setting of F8 is
described as follows:
-- 1: Hall call forbidden
-- 2: Door open forbidden
-- 3: Overload forbidden
-- 4: Limit switches disabled
After the setting is complete, press the SET button. Then the 7-segment LEDs display
"E88" and blink, prompting that the elevator is being tested. When you press PRG to
exit, F8 is back to 0 automatically.
11. F9: reserved

- 72 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools

12. FA: auto-tuning

After you enter the FA menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". The setting of FA is as
follows:
-- 0: No function
-- 1: With-load auto-tuning
-- 2: No-load auto-tuning
-- 3:PMSM parameter identification
After the setting is complete, press the SET button. Then the 7-segment LEDs display
"TUNE", and the elevator enters the auto-tuning state. After confirming that the elevator
meets the safe running conditions, press the SET button again to start auto-tuning.
After auto-tuning is complete, the 7-segment LEDs display the current angle for 2s, and
then switch over to the F0 menu.

You can press the PRG button to exit the auto-tuning state.

4.2 Use of the LED Operation Panel

The LED operation panel is connected to the RJ45 interface of the controller by using an
8-core flat cable.
Figure 4-3 Connection between the operation panel and the NICE7000
LED operation panel

RUN LOCAL / REMOT FED / REV TUNE / TC

Hz A V
RPM %

PRG ENTER
RJ45
QUICK

STOP
RUN MF.K
RES

MCTC-PG
NICE7000

You can modify the parameters, monitor the working status and start or stop the controller
by operating the operation panel. The following figure shows the LED operation panel.

- 73 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools NICE7000 User Manual

Figure 4-4 Diagram of the LED operation panel

Function
indicator RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC

Data display
Unit indicator
Hz A V
RPM %

Increment key
Programming
key PRG ENTER Confirm key

Quick key QUICK Shift key

Decrement
key
STOP
RUN key RUN MF.K Stop/Reset key
RES

Fault hiding key

4.2.1 Description of Indicators

•• Status Indicators

Indicator Indication
OFF indicates the controller is in the stop state.
RUN ON indicates the controller is in the running state.

Reserved
LOCAL/REMOT

OFF indicates elevator in up direction.

FWD/REV ON indicates elevator in down direction.

ON indicates in auto-tuning state.

TUNE/TC

•• Unit Indicators

Hz A V
RPM % Hz: Unit of frequency
Hz A V
RPM % A: Unit of current
Hz A V
RPM % V: Unit of voltage
Hz A V
RPM % RPM: Unit of motor speed
Hz A V
RPM % %: Percentage
Indicator is OFF.
Indicator is ON.

- 74 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools

•• LED Display
The five-digit LED data display can show the following range of information:
-- Parameter value
-- Monitoring information
-- Fault code

4.2.2 Description of Keys on the Operation Panel

Table 4-1 Description of keys on the operation panel

Key Name Function

PRG Programming Enter or exit Level-I menu.

Enter the menu interfaces level by level, and confirm the

ENTER Confirm
parameter setting.

Increment Increase data or function code.

Decrement Decrease data or function code.

Select the displayed parameters in turn in the stop or

Shift running state, and select the digit to be modified when
modifying parameters.

RUN Run Start the controller in the operation panel control mode.

STOP Stop the controller when it is in the running state and

Stop/Reset
RES
perform the reset operation when it is in the fault state.

QUICK Quick Enter or exit Level-I quick menu.

Press this key to display or hide the fault information in

MF.K Fault hiding
the fault state, which facilitates parameter viewing.

4.2.3 Operation Procedure

The LED operation panel adopts three-level menu.

The three-level menu consists of function code group (Level I), function code (Level II), and
function code setting value (level III), as shown in the following figure.

- 75 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4 Use of the Commissioning Tools NICE7000 User Manual

Figure 4-5 Operation procedure on the operation panel

Status parameter Level-I menu If there is a blinking digit, press

(Select the function / / to modify the digit.
(default display) code group)

0.000 PRG
F0 ENTER
PRG

Level-II menu
(Select the
function code)
PRG F0-06 ENTER F0-07 ENTER

Next function
ENTER code
Level-III menu
(Set the value of
PRG
Not to save
50.00 To save
the function code) the setting the setting

You can return to Level II menu from Level III menu by pressing PRG or ENTER . The
difference between the two is as follows:

•• After you press ENTER , the system saves the parameter setting first, and then goes
back to Level II menu and shifts to the next function code.

•• After you press PRG , the system does not save the parameter setting, but directly
returns to Level II menu and remains at the current function code.
The following figure shows the shift between the three levels of menus.

Figure 4-6 Shift between the three levels of menus

ENTER
Fd F3
FE FP F0 F1 F2
…FX-00
PRG Fd-00 F2-00 F3-00
FE-00 FP-00 F0-00 F1-00

Fd-26 FE-56 FP-02 F2-18 F3-21

F0-07 F1-25

In Level III menu, if the parameter has no blinking digit, it means that the parameter cannot
be modified. This may be because:
•• Such a parameter is only readable, such as actually detected parameters and running
record parameters.
•• Such a parameter cannot be modified in the running state and can only be changed at
stop.

- 76 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5
System Commissioning
and Functions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 System Commissioning and Functions NICE7000 User Manual

Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Functions

5.1 System Commissioning

CAUTION
•• Ensure that there is no person in the shaft or car before performing commissioning on the
elevator.
•• Ensure that the peripheral circuit and mechanical installation are ready before performing
commissioning.

The following figure shows the commissioning procedure of the system.

Figure 5-1 Commissioning procedure of the system
Start

Check the peripheral Perform load cell auto-

circuit tuning

Commission the door

Check the encoder machine controller

Set related parameters Perform trial normal-

of the elevator speed running

Perform motor auto- Check the leveling

tuning accuracy

Perform trial Perform riding comfort

inspection running commissioning

Perform shaft auto- Perform function

tuning commissioning

End

5.1.1 Check Before Commissioning

The elevator needs to be commissioned after being installed; the correct commissioning
guarantees safe and normal running of the elevator.
Before performing electric commissioning, check whether the electrical part and mechanical
part are ready for commissioning to ensure safety.
At least two persons need to be onsite during commissioning so that the power supply can
be cut off immediately when an abnormality occurs.

- 78 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 5 System Commissioning and Functions

1. Check the field mechanical and electric wiring.

Before power-on, check the peripheral wiring to ensure component and personal safety.
The items to be checked include:
1) Whether the component models are matched
2) Whether the safety circuit is conducted and reliable
3) Whether the door lock circuit is conducted and reliable
4) Whether the shaft is unobstructed, and the car has no passenger and meets the
conditions for safe running
5) Whether the cabinet and traction motor are well grounded
6) Whether the peripheral circuit is correctly wired according to the drawings of the vendor
7) Whether all switches act reliably
8) Whether there is short-circuit to ground by checking the inter-phase resistance of the
main circuit
9) Whether the elevator is set to the inspection state
10) Whether the mechanical installation is complete (otherwise, it will result in equipment
damage and personal injury)

2. Check the encoder.

The pulse signal from the encoder is critical to accurate control of the system. Before
commissioning, check the following items carefully:
1) The encoder is installed reliably with correct wiring. For details on the encoder wiring,
see section 3.6.
2) The signal cable and strong-current circuit of the encoder are laid in different ducts to
prevent interference.
3) The encoder cable is preferably directly connected to the control cabinet. If the cable
is not long enough and an extension cable is required, the extension cable must be
a shielding cable and preferably welded to the original encoder cable by using the
soldering iron.
4) The shielding cable of the encoder cable is grounded on the end connected to the
controller (only one end is grounded to prevent interference).

3. Check the power supply before power-on.

1) The inter-phase voltage of the user power supply is within (380 V±15%), and the
unbalance degree does not exceed 3%.
2) The power input voltage between terminals 24V and COM on the MCB is within (24
VDC±15%).
3) The total lead-in wire gauge and total switch capacity meet the requirements.

- 79 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 System Commissioning and Functions NICE7000 User Manual

Note

If the input voltage exceeds the allowable value, serious damage will be caused. Distinguish the
negative and positive of the DC power supply. Do not run the system when there is input power
phase loss.

4. Check the grounding.

1) Check that the resistance between the following points and the ground is close to
infinity.

-- R, S, T and PE
-- U, V, W and PE
-- 24V and PE on the MCB
-- Motor U, V, W and PE
-- +, – bus terminals and PE
-- Safety circuit, door lock circuit, and inspection circuit terminals and PE
2) Check the grounding terminals of all elevator electrical components and the power
supply of the control cabinet

5.1.2 Trial Running

■■ Trial Running at Inspection Speed

The following figure shows the motor auto-tuning process.
Figure 5-2 Motor auto-tuning process
Set F1-25 correctly based on
the actually used motor type

For with-load auto-tuning,

F1-25 = 0 With-load set F1-11 to 1. After the
(Asynchronous motor) auto-tuning
Set F0-01 to 0 operation panel displays
Set encoder parameters FH-01 "TUNE", press the RUN key.
(Operation panel
and FH-02 and motor parameters Static motor auto-tuning
control)
F1-01 to F1-05 correctly starts.
F1-25 = 1
(Synchronous motor)
With-load auto-tuning No-load auto-tuning No-load auto-tuning

For no-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 After motor parameters F1-06

F0-01 = 1 F0-01 = 0 to 2. The operation panel displays to F1-10 are obtained,
F1-11 = 1 F1-11 = 2 "TUNE". Release the brake restore F0-01 to 1 (Distance
manually and press the RUN key. control). Motor auto-tuning is
Motor auto-tuning starts. completed.

Check the initial angle and wiring mode After motor parameter values
For with-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 to of the encoder (FH-04 and FH-06) after (F1-06 to F1-10, F1-15 to F1-17)
1. After the operation panel displays motor auto-tuning. Perform motor auto- and current loop parameters are
"TUNE", press the inspection Up/Down tuning multiple times and ensure that obtained, restore F0-01 to 1
button to start auto-tuning. The motor the difference between values of FH-04 (Distance control). Motor auto-
starts to run. is within 5° and values of FH-06 are the tuning is completed.
same.

- 80 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 5 System Commissioning and Functions

Switchover between synchronous motor and asynchronous motor is implemented easily by

changing F1-25.
Follow the following precautions:
•• Ensure that all wiring and installation meet the safety specifications.
•• Set F1-25 (Motor type) and set motor parameters in group F1 (F1-01 to F1-05) correctly.
Incorrect setting will result in auto-tuning failure.
•• Set FH-01 (Encoder type) and FH-02 (Encoder PPR) correctly. Ensure that the motor is
in CLVC (F0-00 = 1) and distance control (F0-01 = 1) mode.
•• Ensure that the motor wiring is correct (UVW cables of the motor respectively connected
to UVW cables of the controller) for with-load auto-tuning. If the motor wiring is incorrect,
the motor may jitter or fail to run after the brake is released; in this case, you need to
replace any two of the motor UVW cables.
•• Reset the current fault and then start auto-tuning, because the system cannot enter the
auto-tuning state ("TUNE" is not displayed) when there is a fault.
•• Perform motor auto-tuning again if the phase sequence or encoder of the synchronous
motor is changed.
•• For the synchronous motor, perform three or more times of auto-tuning, compare the
obtained values of FH-04 (Encoder initial angle). The value deviation of FH-04 shall be
within ±5°, which indicates that the auto-tuning is successful.
•• After the auto-tuning is completed, perform trial inspection running. Check whether the
current is normal, whether the actual running direction is the same as the set direction.
If the running direction is different from the set direction, change the value of F0-05.
•• With-load auto-tuning is dangerous (inspection-speed running of many control cabinets
is emergency electric running and the shaft safety circuit is shorted). Ensure that there
is no person in the shaft in this auto-tuning mode.
More descriptions of motor auto-tuning are as follows:
•• For synchronous motor, with-load auto-tuning learns stator resistance, shaft-D and
shaft-Q inductance, current loop (including position lock) PI parameters, and encoder
initial angle; no-load auto-tuning additionally learns the encoder wiring mode.
•• For the asynchronous motor, static auto-tuning learns stator resistance, rotor resistance,
and leakage inductance, and automatically calculates the mutual inductance and
motor magnetizing current. Complete auto-tuning learns the mutual inductance, motor
magnetizing current, and current loop parameters.
•• For the synchronous motor, when F1-11 = 3, the controller learns current loop
parameters in motor static state, and the brake is not released.
•• For the asynchronous motor, F1-11 =3 is the same as F1-11 = 1.
•• The controller learns current loop parameters by default during auto-tuning. If the riding
comfort is satisfactory, set FA-12 Bit2 to 1 to cancel self-adaptation of current loop PI
parameters when performing auto-tuning again.
■■ Trial Running at Normal Speed
After ensuring that running at inspection speed is normal, perform shaft auto-tuning, ensure

- 81 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 System Commissioning and Functions NICE7000 User Manual

that the elevator satisfies the safety running requirements, and then perform trial running at
normal speed.
To perform shaft auto-tuning, the following conditions must be satisfied:
1. The signals of the encoder and leveling sensors (NC, NO) are correct and the slow-
down switches are installed properly and act correctly.
2. When the elevator is at the bottom floor, the down slow-down 1 switch acts.
3. The elevator is in the inspection state. The control mode is distance control and CLVC
(F0-00 = 1, F0-01 = 1).
4. The top floor number (F6-00) and bottom floor number (F6-01) are set correctly.

STOP
5. The system is not in the fault alarm state. If there is a fault at the moment, press RES

to reset the fault.

Then set F7-26 to 1 on the operation panel or set F7 to 1 on the keypad of the MCB,
and start shaft auto-tuning.

Note

For shaft auto-tuning when there are only two floors, the elevator needs to run to below the bottom
leveling position, that is, the leveling sensor is disconnected from the leveling plate. There is no
such requirement when there are multiple floors.

5.2 Door Machine Controller Commissioning

Correlation of the door machine controller and the elevator controller is that:
•• The CTB outputs door open/close command;
•• the door machine controller feeds back the door open/close limit signal.
After commissioning and installation of the door machine controller are complete, check:
•• Whether the wiring is correct
•• Whether the door open/close limit signals are consistent with the default setting
To perform the door machine controller commissioning, do as follows:
1. In the terminal control mode of the door machine controller:
a. Manually short the door open relay output terminal BM/B1 and the door close relay
output terminal BM/B2 on the CTB.
b. Observe whether the door machine can open and close correspondingly.
c. If the door machine cannot act properly, check:
Whether BM/B1 and BM/B2 are wrongly connected to the input terminals of the door
machine controller
Whether commissioning of the door machine controller is complete

- 82 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 5 System Commissioning and Functions

2. After ensuring that control of door open/close is normal, check whether the door open/
close signal feedback from the door machine controller is normal.
a. Check the NO/NC states of the door input signals by observing the input indicators on
the CTB, as listed in the following table.
Table 5-1 NO/NC state of the door input signals

NO Input Signal NC Input Signal

Door
Signal Input Point FL-00 FL-00
State Indicator State Indicator State
Setting Setting
X3 (door open limit 1) Bit2 = 1 When the Bit2 = 0
Door When the signal
signal is
open limit X4 (door open limit 2) is active, the Bit4 = 1 Bit4 = 0
active, the
corresponding
corresponding
Door X5 (door close limit 1) input indicator is Bit3 = 1 Bit3 = 0
input indicator
close limit X6 (door close limit 2) ON.
Bit5 = 1 is OFF. Bit5 = 0

For details on the setting of FL-00, see the description of FL-00 in Chapter 7.
b. Check whether the door open/close limit signal received by the system is correct.
Control the door to the open or close state manually and view the value of FU-26. If the
following screen is displayed, it indicates that the door machine controller feeds back
the correct door open and close signals.
Figure 5-3 Door open and close limit monitoring signals

Door 1
open limit

5 4 3 2 1

Door 1
close limit

5.3 Riding Comfort

The riding comfort is an important factor of the elevator's overall performance. Improper
installation of mechanical parts and improper parameter settings will cause discomfort.
Enhancing the riding comfort mainly involves adjustment of the controller output and the
elevator's mechanical construction.

- 83 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 System Commissioning and Functions NICE7000 User Manual

■■ Controller Output
The parameters that may influence the riding comfort are described in this part.

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description
Code
Speed loop F2-00 and F2-01 are the PI
F2-00 0–100 40
proportional gain KP1 regulation parameters when the
running frequency is lower than
Speed loop integral
F2-01 0.01–10.00s 0.60s F2-02 (Switchover frequency
time TI1
1). F2-03 and F2-04 are the
F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz PI regulation parameters
when the running frequency is
Speed loop higher than F2-02 (Switchover
F2-03 0–100 35
proportional gain KP2 frequency 2). The regulation
Speed loop integral parameters between F2-02
F2-04 0.01–10.00s 0.80s
time TI2 and F2-04 are the weighted
average value of F2-00 & F2-
F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz 01 and F2-03 & F2-04.

For a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral time.
Be aware that a fast system response causes system oscillation.
The recommended regulating method is as follows:
The default setting meets the requirements of most applications. If the default setting cannot
meet the requirements (especially when the motor power is very small), the default speed
loop proportional gain may be a little large, and the motor oscillates at startup.
In this case, decrease the proportional gain first to ensure that the system does not oscillate,
and then reduce the integral time to ensure that the system has quick response but small
overshoot.
If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are set to 0,
only F2-03 and F2-04 are valid.

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description
Code
Current loop
F2-06 10–500 60 F2-06 and F2-07 are the current
proportional gain
loop adjustment parameters in the
Current loop integral vector control algorithm.
F2-07 10–500 30
gain

The optimum values of these two parameters are obtained during motor auto-tuning, and
you need not modify them. Appropriate setting of the parameters can restrain jitter during
running and have obvious effect on the riding comfort.

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description
Code
Current filter time It can reduce the lower-
F2-20 (synchronous 0.00–40.00 0.00 frequency vertical jitter during
motor) running.

- 84 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 5 System Commissioning and Functions

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description
Code
Startup acceleration
F2-22 0.000–1.500s 0.000s
time
It can reduce the terrace
feeling at startup caused by the
F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 m/s 0.000 m/s
breakout friction of the guide rail.
F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500s 0.000s
Zero-speed control It specifies the zero speed
F3-18 0.000–1.000s 0.200s
time at startup holding time before brake output.
0.200s It specifies the brake release
F3-19 Brake release delay 0.000–2.000s
0.600s time.
It specifies the zero speed
Zero-speed control
F3-20 0.000–1.000s 0.300s holding time after the brake is
time at end
applied.
F3-21 Brake apply delay 0.200–1.500s 0.200s It specifies the brake apply time.

For details on these parameters, see the running time sequence in Figure 7-3.
The release time of the brakes varies according to the types and the response time of the
brakes is greatly influenced by the ambient temperature. A very high brake coil temperature
slows the brake responsiveness. Thus, when the riding comfort at startup or stop cannot
be improved by adjusting position lock or load cell compensation parameters, appropriately
increase the values of F3-19 and F3-21 to check whether the brake release time influences
the riding comfort.

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Remarks
Code
0: Invalid
F2-11 No-load-cell startup 0
1: Valid
These are position lock
F2-12 Position lock speed Kp 0.00–2.00 0.50
regulating parameters
F2-13 Position lock speed Ki 0.00–2.00 0.60 when automatic pre-
torque compensation is
F2-14 Position lock current KP1 10–1000 60 used (F8-01 = 1).
Position lock current loop
F2-15 10–1000 30
KI1

When automatic pre-torque compensation is used (applicable to all types of encoder, but
best effect for ERN1387) the system automatically adjusts the compensated torque at
startup.
a. Set F2-11 to 1 to enable no-load-cell startup.
b. Gradually increase F2-12 (Position lock current coefficient) but ensure that the motor
does not oscillate.
c. Gradually increase F2-13 if increasing F2-12 cannot meet the torque compensation
requirement.

- 85 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 System Commissioning and Functions NICE7000 User Manual

d. Large motor noise indicate excessive values of F2-14/F2-15. Decrease their values.

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Remarks
Code
0: Invalid
F8-01 Pre-torque selection 1: Load call pre-torque 0
compensation
These are pre-torque
F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0%–100.0% 50.0% regulating parameters.
F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60

When F8-01 is set to 1 (Load cell pre-torque compensation), the system with a load cell pre-
outputs the torque matched the load to ensure the riding comfort of the elevator.
•• Motor driving state: full-load up, no-load down
•• Motor braking state: full-load down, no-load up
F8-02 (Pre-torque offset) is actually the elevator balance coefficient, namely, the percentage
of the car load to the rated load when the car and counterweight are balanced.
F8-03 (Drive gain) or F8-04 (Brake gain) scales the elevator’s present pre-torque coefficient
when the motor runs at the drive or brake side.
If the gain set is higher, then the calculated value of startup pro-torque compensation is
higher. The controller identifies the braking or driving state according to the load cell signal
and automatically calculates the required torque compensation value.
When an analog device is used to measure the load, these parameters are used to adjust
the elevator startup. The method of adjusting the startup is as follows:
•• In the driving state, increasing the value of F8-03 could reduce the rollback during the
elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start.
•• In the braking state, increasing the value of F8-04 could reduce the jerk in command
direction during the elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start.
■■ Mechanical Construction
The mechanical construction affecting the riding comfort involves installation of the guide
rail, guide shoe, steel rope, and brake, balance of the car, and the resonance caused by the
car, guild rail and motor. For asynchronous motor, abrasion or improper installation of the
gearbox may arouse poor riding comfort.
1. Installation of the guide rail mainly involves the verticality and surface flatness of the
guide rail, smoothness of the guide rail connection and parallelism between two guide
rails (including guide rails on the counterweight side).
2. Tightness of the guide shoes (including the one on the counterweight side) also
influences the riding comfort. The guide shoes must not be too loose or tight.
1. The drive from the motor to the car totally depends on the steel rope. Large flexibility of
the steel rope with irregular resistance during the car running may cause curly oscillation
of the car. In addition, unbalanced stress of multiple steel ropes may cause the car to
jitter during running.

- 86 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 5 System Commissioning and Functions

2. The riding comfort during running may be influenced if the brake arm is installed too
tightly or released incompletely.
3. If the car weight is unbalanced, it will cause uneven stress of the guide shoes that
connect the car and the guide rail. As a result, the guide shoes will rub with the guide
rail during running, affecting the riding comfort.
4. For asynchronous motor, abrasion or improper installation of the gearbox may also
affect the riding comfort.
5. Resonance is an inherent character of a physical system, related to the material
and quality of system components. If you are sure that the oscillation is caused by
resonance, reduce the resonance by increasing or decreasing the car weight or
counterweight and adding resonance absorbers at connections of the components (for
example, place rubber blanket under the motor).

5.4 Password Setting

The NICE7000 provides the parameter password protection function. Here gives an
example of changing the password into 12345 ( indicates the blinking digit), as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 5-4 Example of changing the password
Status parameter
(default display)

PRG PRG
0.000 F0 FP ENTER PRG

PRG
FP-00 FP-01
ENTER

PRG 00000
If there is a blinking digit, press
/ / to modify the digit.

12345 ENTER
To save the
setting

•• After you set the user password (set FP-00 to a non-zero value), the system requires
user password authentication (the system displays "------") when you press PRG. In this
case, you can modify the function code parameters only after entering the password
correctly.
•• For factory parameters (group FF), you also need to enter the factory password.
•• Do not try to modify the factory parameters. If these parameters are set improperly, the
system may be unstable or abnormal.
•• In the password protection unlocked state, you can change the password at any time.
The last input number will be the user password.
•• If you want to disable the password protection function, enter the correct password
and then set FP-00 to 0. If FP-00 is a non-zero value at power-on, the parameters are
protected by the password.

- 87 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 System Commissioning and Functions NICE7000 User Manual

•• Remember the password you set. Otherwise, the system cannot be unlocked.

5.5 System Functions

5.5.1 Emergency Evacuation at Power Failure

Passengers may be entrapped in the car if power failure suddenly happens during the use
of the elevator. The emergency evacuation function at power failure is designed to solve the
problem.
The emergency evacuation function is implemented in the following two modes:
1. Emergency power supply (EPS)
2. Shorting PMSM stator
These modes are described in details in the following part.
1. EPS
1) 220 V UPS

In this scheme, the 220 V UPS supplies power to the main unit and the drive control circuit.
The following figure shows the emergency 220 V UPS circuit.
Figure 5-5 220 V UPS circuit
UPC
R
21 22
N
61 62

UPS-220 V (6 A) Transformer

1 2
220 VAC
MCB
UPC
Y6 M6
A1 A2 220 VAC 115 VAC
Safety
contactor 21 22

UPC (6 A) 115 VDC

UPS-0 V
3 4

R
5 6
S
T
NICE7000
13 14

The following figure shows various contacts of the contactors.

- 88 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 5 System Commissioning and Functions

Figure 5-6 Various contacts of the contactors

Phase sequence relay
UPC Safety contactor
Safety 11 14 71 72
110 V 0V
circuit A1 A2
UPC
53 54

UPC
Emergency 21 22
X20
feedback 24 V

2 4 6 14 22 54 62 72 82
UPC
1 3 5 13 21 53 61 71 81

The UPS power is recommended in the following table.

Table 5-2 Recommended UPS power for each power class

UPS Power Controller Power

1 kVA (700–800 W) P ≤ 5.5 kW
2 kVA (1400–1600 W) 5.5 kW < P ≤ 11 kW
3 kVA (2100–2400 W) 15 kW

The following table lists the setting of the related parameters.

Table 5-3 Parameter setting under the 220 V UPS scheme

Function Code Parameter Name Setting

F3-12 Low speed emergency evacuation speed Default
F3-15 Normal speed emergency evacuation speed Default
F3-16 Acceleration rate at emergency evacuation Default
F5-20 (X20) X20 function selection 127
F5-37 (Y6) Y6 function selection 13
F6-26 Emergency evacuation time limit Default

For more details, see the descriptions of F3-14.

2) 48 V EPS

In this scheme, the 48 VDC EPS supplies power to the main unit; the 220 V inverted from
the 48 VDC supplies power to the drive control circuit and transformer-related brake and
door machine circuits.
The following figure shows the emergency 48 V EPS principle diagram.

- 89 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 System Commissioning and Functions NICE7000 User Manual

Figure 5-7 48 V EPS principle diagram

SC (safety contactor) SW (RUN contactor)

R' R U
1 2 1 2
S'
3 4
S V
3 4 M
T' T W
5 6 5 6 Motor
N NICE 7 000

S1 R1

R0 L1 Connected to 220 V power

when 48 V EPS is used
T0 N

UPC (UPS feedback)

X20
21 22

Figure 5-8 48 V EPS circuit

UPC

Battery + 3 4
R1
48 V
power unit
- 5 6
S1

R0
JUP
T0

220 V
1 2 0

R'
71 72
QF1(10A) 110 VAC
Battery N
inverter unit 81 82 220
0V
13 14
230
MCB
220 VAC
UPC 250
Y6 M6
A1 A2
JUP TRF1
SC A1 A2
21 22

2. Shorting PMSM stator

Shorting PMSM stator means shorting phases UVW of the PMSM, which produces
resistance to restrict movement of the elevator car.
In field application, an auxiliary NC contact is usually added to the NO contact of the output
contactor to short PMSM UVW phases to achieve the effect. It is feasible in theory but may
cause over-current actually.

- 90 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 5 System Commissioning and Functions

Due to the poor quality of the contactor and the wiring of adding the auxiliary contact, the
residual current of the controller is still high when the outputs UVW are shorted at abnormal
stop. This results in an over-current fault and may damage the controller or motor.
Monarch recommends two schemes which have better effect.
1) Special contactor with shorting PMSM stator function
2) Independent contactor + Relay NC contact
1) Special contactor with shorting PMSM stator function

The MG-BF series contactor produced by Tianjin the Second Relay Factory is used. This
contactor provides the shorting PMSM stator function itself, featuring safety, reliability and
easy wiring.
Figure 5-9 Wiring when using the special contactor
C R

Y1 102
Safety circuit
M1 132
SW: RUN contactor

NICE7000

U
U
1 2
V
V
3 4 M
W
W
5 6 Motor
SW

2) Independent contactor + Relay NC contact

An independent contactor for implementing the shorting PMSM stator function is used.
The shorting PMSM stator function is implemented via the relay NC contact.
On the coil circuit of the RUN contactor, an NO contact of the contactor is connected in
serial, to ensure that output short circuit does not occur when the parameter setting is
incorrect.
The following figure shows wiring of this scheme.

- 91 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 System Commissioning and Functions NICE7000 User Manual

Figure 5-10 Wiring of the independent contactor + Relay NC contact

FX
24V

Regen. resistor
1 2
X18
Safety 3 4
contactor

X18
SW
R + – BR
U
Three-phase AC S 1 2 Motor
power supply V
T
W M
3 4
NICE7000
5 6
Encoder
MCTC-PG

C R Shield
FX
Y1
SW
Y1
M1 M1 5 6 Safety circuit
Y2
M2
Y3
C R
M3
Y4
M4
Y5 Y3
M5 FX
Y6
M6 M3 110 VAC

FX: Contactor for shorting PMSM stator

SW: RUN contactor

The parameter setting in such wiring mode is described in the following table.
Table 5-4 Parameter setting under the shorting PMSM stator scheme

Function
Parameter Name Value Description
Code
Allocate X18 with "Input of shorting PMSM
F5-18 X18 function selection 30
stator feedback signal".
Allocate Y3 with "Output of shorting PMSM
F5-34 Y3 function selection 12
stator contactor feedback signal".
Elevator function Bit8 = 0: NC output contactor
F6-10 -
selection 2 Bit8 = 1: NO output contactor

5.5.2 Parallel/Group Control

The NICE7000 supports parallel control of two elevators or group control of up to eight
elevators. It carries out elevator information exchange and processing through the CAN2
communication port, which implements coordination between multiple elevators to respond
to hall calls and improves the elevator use efficiency.
The following table lists the parameters to be set for parallel/group control.
Table 5-5 Parameter setting of parallel/group control

Function Parameter Setting in Parallel Setting in Group

Setting Range
Code Name Control Control
Number of
elevators in
Fd-00 1–8 2 3–8
parallel/group
mode

- 92 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 5 System Commissioning and Functions

Function Parameter Setting in Parallel Setting in Group

Setting Range
Code Name Control Control
1: master elevator 1: master elevator
Fd-01 Elevator No. 1–8
2: slave elevator 2–8: slave elevator
Applicable to parallel
0: Parallel control
Parallel/Group control of 2 elevators
Fd-02
control mode 2: Group control of Applicable to group
traditional mode control

The parallel/group control function has the following features:

•• When hall calls are registered, the system calculates the response time of the elevators
in parallel/group control in real time (based on distance, elevator arrival, door open/
close), and responds to all calls in the optimum way, minimizing the passenger waiting
time.
•• The elevators are configured as the master and slave ones. When they have the same
response conditions, the system instructs the master or slave to respond a call based
on the random function.
•• The parallel/group control function considers the call response time, elevator use
efficiency, and in-car passenger waiting time. It avoids use ratio imbalance of elevators,
implements coordination between elevators to respond to hall calls and improves the
elevator use efficiency.
The following part describes the parallel control and group control in detail.
1) Parallel control
•• Parameter setting
To use parallel control, connect the CAN2+ and CAN2- terminals of CN6 on the
controller to respectively the corresponding terminals on the other one.
The following table lists the parameter setting of parallel control.
Table 5-6 Parameter setting of parallel control

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Setting in Parallel Control

Number of elevators in
Fd-00 1–2 1–2
parallel/group mode

1: master elevator
Fd-01 Elevator No. 1–2
2: slave elevator

•• Address Setting of Physical Floors

Physical floor, relative to the NICE control system, is defined by the installation position
of the leveling plate.
The floor (such as the ground floor) at which the lowest leveling plate is installed
corresponds to physical floor 1.
The top physical floor is the accumulative number of the leveling plates.

- 93 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 System Commissioning and Functions NICE7000 User Manual

In parallel mode, the physical floor numbers of the same floor for two elevators are
consistent.
If the floor structures of two elevators are different, physical floors should start with the
floor with the lowest position.
The physical floors at the overlapped area of the two elevators are the same.
Even if one elevator does not stop a floor in the overlapped area, a leveling plate should
be installed there. You can make the elevator not stop at the floor by setting service
floors.
When two elevators are in parallel mode, the addresses of the HCBs should be set
according to physical floors. Parallel running can be implemented only when the HCB
address set for one elevator is the same as that for the other elevator in terms of the
same floor.

Note

In parallel mode, the top floor (F6-00) and bottom floor (F6-01) of the elevators should be set
based on corresponding physical floors.

Assume that there are two elevators in parallel mode. Elevator 1 stops at floor B1, floor 1,
floor 2, and floor 3, while elevator 2 stops at floor 1, floor 3, and floor 4. Now, you need to
set related parameters and HCB addresses according to the following table.
Table 5-7 Parameter setting example of parallel control

Elevator 1 Elevator 2
Number of elevators in
2 2
parallel/group mode (Fd-00)
Elevator No. (Fd-01) 1 2
HCB
Actual floor Physical floor HCB display HCB address HCB display
address
B1 1 1 FE-01 = 1101 / /
1 2 2 FE-02 = 1901 2 FE-02 = 1901
Non-stop floor
2 3 3 FE-03 = 1902 but leveling plate FE-03 = 1902
required
3 4 4 FE-04 = 1903 4 FE-04 = 1903
4 5 / / 5 FE-05 = 1904
Bottom floor (F6-01) 1 2
Top floor (F6-00) 4 5
Service floor (F6-05) 65535 65531 (not stop at physical floor 3)

- 94 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 5 System Commissioning and Functions

•• Wiring for parallel control by CAN2

Figure 5-11 Wiring when CAN2 (CN6) is used for parallel control
CAN2 cables for parallel control

CAN2+
CAN2 -

CAN2+
CAN2 -
Elevator Elevator
CN6 CN6
1# 2#

NICE7000 NICE7000
24V 24V
COM COM
Mod1+
Mod1-
CN3 Mod1+
Mod1-
CN3
CAN1+ CAN1+
CAN1- CAN1-

Elevator 1# Elevator 2#
24V 24V
CAN+ MCTC-CTB CAN+ MCTC-CTB
CAN- CAN-
COM COM

CN2 CN2

24V 24V
Mod+ MCTC-HCB Mod+ MCTC-HCB
Mod- Mod-
COM COM

CN1 CN1

2) Group control
•• Parameter setting
To use group control, connect the CAN2+ and CAN2- terminals of CN6 on the controllers for
group control.
The following table lists the parameter setting of group control.
Table 5-8 Parameter setting of group control

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Setting in Group Control

Number of elevators in
Fd-00 3–8 3–8
parallel/group mode
1: master elevator
Fd-01 Elevator No. 1–8
2–8: slave elevator
Fd-02 Parallel/Group control mode 0–2 2

•• Address Setting of Physical Floors

The setting principle is the same as that for parallel control.
Assume that there are two elevators in parallel mode. Elevator 1 stops at floor B1, floor
1, floor 2, and floor 3; elevator 2 stops at floor 1, floor 3, and floor 4; elevator 3 stops at
floor B1, floor 1, floor 2, and floor 3. Now, set related parameters and HCB addresses

- 95 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 System Commissioning and Functions NICE7000 User Manual

according to the following table.

Table 5-9 Parameter setting example of group control on three elevators

Elevator 1 Elevator 2 Elevator 3

Number of
elevators in
3 3 3
parallel/group
mode (Fd-00)
Elevator No.
1 2 3
(Fd-01)
Actual Physical HCB HCB
HCB display HCB address HCB display HCB display
floor floor address address
B1 1 1 FE-01 = 1101 / / 1 FE-01 = 1101
1 2 2 FE-02 = 1901 2 FE-02 = 1901 2 FE-02 = 1901
Non-stop floor
2 3 3 FE-03 = 1902 but leveling FE-03 = 1902 3 FE-03 = 1902
plate required
3 4 4 FE-04 = 1903 4 FE-04 = 1903 4 FE-04 = 1903
4 5 / / 5 FE-05 = 1904 / /
Bottom floor
1 2 1
(F6-01)
Top floor (F6-00) 4 5 4
Service floor (F6- 65531 (not stop at physical
65535 65535
05) floor 3)

•• Wiring for group control by CAN2

Figure 5-12 Wiring when CAN2 (CN6) is used for group control
CAN2 cables for group control
CAN2+
CAN2+

CAN2 -
CAN2 -

Elevator
CAN2+

CAN2+

Elevator
CAN2 -

CAN2 -

Elevator CN6 Elevator

CN6 CN6 CN6
1# 2# 3# 8#

NICE7000 NICE7000 NICE7000 NICE7000

24V 24V 24V 24V
COM COM COM COM
Mod1+
Mod1-
CN3 Mod1+
Mod1-
CN3 Mod1+
Mod1-
CN3 Mod1+
Mod1-
CN3
CAN1+ CAN1+ CAN1+ CAN1+
CAN1- CAN1- CAN1- CAN1-

Elevator 1# Elevator 2# Elevator 3# ... Elevator 8#

24V 24V 24V 24V
CAN+ MCTC-CTB CAN+ MCTC-CTB CAN+ MCTC-CTB CAN+ MCTC-CTB
CAN- CAN- CAN- CAN-
COM COM COM COM

CN2 CN2 CN2 CN2

24V 24V 24V 24V

Mod+ MCTC-HCB Mod+ MCTC-HCB Mod+ MCTC-HCB Mod+ MCTC-HCB
Mod- Mod- Mod- Mod-
COM COM COM COM

CN1 CN1 CN1 CN1

5.5.3 Opposite Door Control

The NICE7000 implements opposite door control through Modbus communication port. Hall

- 96 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 5 System Commissioning and Functions

call communication of door 1 is executed by Mod1 and that of door 2 is executed by Mod2.
The NICE7000 supports opposite door control on a maximum of 56 floors.
The following table describes the control modes and related parameter setting.
Table 5-10 Opposite door control modes and parameter setting

Opposite Door Control

Parameter Setting Function Description
Mode

Fb-00 = 2 The front door and back door acts

Simultaneous
Mode 1 simultaneously upon arrival for hall calls and
control Fb-01 = 0 car calls.
Hall call The corresponding door opens upon arrival
Fb-00 = 2
independent, for hall calls from this door.
Mode 2 Fb-01 = 5 (Bit0, Bit2 =
car call The front door and back door act
simultaneous 1)
simultaneously upon arrival for car calls.
The corresponding door opens upon arrival
for halls call from this door.
Hall call
Fb-00 = 2 Upon arrival for car calls, the door to open
independent,
is selected between the front door and back
Mode 3 car call Fb-01 = 325 (Bit0, Bit2, door by using the door switchover switch.
manual Bit6, Bit8 = 1)
control Note: The switchover switch can be
connected to the HCB-B inside the car or
MCB (function 42/142: Back door selection).
Hall call Fb-00 = 2
independent, The corresponding door opens upon arrival
Mode 4 Fb-01 = 271 (Bit 0, Bit1, for halls call and car calls from this door.
car call
independent Bit2, Bit3, Bit8 = 1)

Note

In the fire emergency, inspection, and re-leveling state, the opposite door is under simultaneous
control rather than independent control.

- 97 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 System Commissioning and Functions NICE7000 User Manual

HCB addresses of door 1 and door 2 are set based on the actual physical addresses and
must be consistent.
Figure 5-13 HCB wiring of opposite door control

NICE7000
PRG UP SET
CN3 CN6
+24V COM Mod1+Mod1- +24V COM Mod2+ Mod2-

Operation box Operation box

of top floor of top floor

Operation box Operation box

of Nth floor of Nth floor

Operation box Operation box

of bottom floor of bottom floor

Front door HCB Back door HCB

Note

The car call signals of front door and back door are respectively connected to CN7 and CN8 on
the CTB.

The parameter setting of Fb-01 for opposite door control is described as follows:

Bit Function Setting Bit Function Setting

Independent for
Independent for front
1 front door and 1
door and back door
back door
Hall call Car call
Bit0 button Bit1 button
display Consistent for front display Consistent for front
0 door and back 0
door and back door
door

Corresponding Corresponding door

Hall call door 1 Car call door 1
Bit2 door open Bit3 open
open mode open mode
0 Both doors open 0 Both doors open

- 98 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 5 System Commissioning and Functions

Bit Function Setting Bit Function Setting

Independent for
Independent for front
1 front door and 1
Door open Door close door and back door
back door
Bit8 button Bit9 button
display Consistent for front display Consistent for front
0 door and back 0
door and back door
door
Corresponding Corresponding door
Door open 1 Door close 1
Bit10 door open Bit11 open
by button by button
0 Both doors open 0 Both doors open
Front/ Only one door open
1 Valid 1
Back door Door mutual on any condition
Bit6 Bit13
switchover exclusive
by switch 0 Invalid 0 Both doors open

Independent for
1 front door and
Light curtain back door
Bit14
judgment Consistent for front
0 door and back
door

- 99 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5 System Commissioning and Functions NICE7000 User Manual

- 100 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6
Function Code Table

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Chapter 6 Function Code Table

6.1 Function Code Description

1. There are a total of 31 function code groups, each of which includes several function
codes. The function codes adopt the three-level menu. The function code group number
is Level-I menu; the function code number is Level-II menu; the function code setting is
Level-III menu.
2. To improve operation security, users need to enter the passwords for operating group
F1, FA, and FH parameters. Their initial passwords are 01000.
3. The meaning of each column in the function code table is as follows:

Function Code Indicates the function code number.

Parameter Name Indicates the parameter name of the function code.

Setting Range Indicates the setting range of the parameter.

Default Indicates the default setting of the parameter at factory.

Unit Indicates the measurement unit of the parameter.

Indicates whether the parameter can be modified (including the modification

Property
conditions)

The modification property of the parameters includes three types, described as follows:
"☆": The parameter can be modified when the controller is in either stop or running state.
"★": The parameter cannot be modified when the controller is in the running state.
"●": The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modified.
The system automatically restricts the modification property of all parameters to prevent
mal-function.

6.2 Function Code Groups

On the operation panel, press PRG and then or , and you can view the function
code groups. The function code groups are classified as follows:

Function Function Function

Type Type Type
Code Group Code Group Code Group
Extension
Basic Auxiliary logic
F0 F8 FL terminal function
parameters parameters
parameters

- 102 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function Function Function

Type Type Type
Code Group Code Group Code Group
Leveling
Motor
F1 F9 Time parameters Fr adjustment
parameters
parameters
Vector control Auxiliary Monitoring
F2 FA FU
parameters parameters parameters
Running control Door function Factory
F3 Fb FF
parameters parameters parameters
Floor Brief fault
F4 FC FP User parameters
parameters information

Terminal
Parallel/Group
F5 function Fd E0 to E9 Fault details
control parameters
parameters

Elevator logic Display

F6 FE
parameters parameters
Intelligent
Close-loop
F7 commissioning FH
parameters
parameters

6.3 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Group F0: Basic parameters
0: Sensorless vector control
(SVC)
F0-00 Control mode 1: Closed-loop vector control 1 - ★
(CLVC)
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
Command source 0: Operation panel control
F0-01 1 - ★
selection 1: Distance control
Running speed
F0-02 under operation 0.050 to F0-04 0.050 m/s ☆
panel control
Maximum running
F0-03 0.100 to F0-04 1.600 m/s ★
speed
Rated elevator
F0-04 0.100–4.000 1.600 m/s ★
speed
Elevator running
F0-05 0–1 0 - ★
direction
F0-07 Carrier frequency 2.0–16.0 8.0 kHz ★
Group F1: Motor parameters
Group F1 security
F1-00 0–65535 01000 - ★
password

- 103 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Model
F1-01 Rated motor power 1.1–132.0 kW ★
dependent
Rated motor
F1-02 50–600 380 V ★
voltage
Rated motor
F1-03 0.00–655.00 25 A ★
current
Rated motor
F1-04 0.00–99.00 50 Hz ★
frequency
F1-05 Rated motor speed 0–3000 1460 RPM ★
F1-06 Stator resistance 0.000–65.000 0.000 Ω ★
F1-07 Rotor resistance 0.000–65.000 0.000 Ω ★
Leakage
F1-08 0.00–650.00 2.34 mH ★
inductance
F1-09 Mutual inductance 0.1–3000.0 66.6 mH ★
Magnetizing
F1-10 0.01–650.00 10.7 A ★
current
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode 2: No-load auto-tuning 0 - ★
3: Current loop parameter
identification (only for
synchronous motor)
Angle-free auto-
F1-12 tuning function Bit1: Angle-auto-tuning-free 0 - ★
selection
Motor auto-tuning
F1-13 30–150 60 % ★
current
Shaft Q inductance
F1-15 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
(torque)
Shaft D inductance
F1-16 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
(excitation)
F1-17 Back EMF 0–65535 0 - ★
0: Asynchronous motor
F1-25 Motor type 1 - ★
1: Synchronous motor
Group F2: Vector control parameters
Speed loop
F2-00 proportional gain 0–100 40 - ★
KP1
Speed loop integral
F2-01 0.01–10.00 0.60 s ★
time TI1
Switchover
F2-02 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz ★
frequency 1

- 104 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Speed loop
F2-03 proportional gain 1–100 35 - ★
KP2
Speed loop integral
F2-04 0.01–10.00 0.80 s ★
time TI2
Switchover
F2-05 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz ★
frequency 2
Current loop KP1
F2-06 10–1000 60 - ★
(torque)
Current loop KI1
F2-07 10–1000 30 - ★
(torque)
F2-08 Torque upper limit 0.0–200.0 150.0 % ★
Current loop KP2
F2-09 10–1000 60 - ★
(excitation)
Current loop KI2
F2-10 10–1000 30 - ★
(excitation)
No-load-cell 0: Invalid
F2-11 0 - ★
startup 1: Valid
Position lock speed
F2-12 1–100 35 - ☆
KP
Position lock speed
F2-13 0.01–10.00 0.8 - ☆
KI
Position lock
F2-14 current loop KP1 10–1000 60 - ☆
(torque)
Position lock
F2-15 current loop KI1 10-1000 30 - ☆
(torque)
Position lock
F2-16 current loop KP2 10–1000 60 - ☆
(excitation)
Position lock
F2-17 current loop KI2 10-1000 30 - ☆
(excitation)
Torque
F2-18 0–500 1 ms ★
acceleration time
Torque
F2-19 0–500 350 ms ★
deceleration time
Current filter
F2-20 0.00–40.00 0.00 - ★
coefficient
Position lock
F2-21 0–9999 0 Pulses ●
rollback coefficient
Startup
F2-22 0.000–1.500 0.000 s ★
acceleration time

- 105 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Group F3: Running control parameters
F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 0.000 m/s ★
Startup holding
F3-01 0.000–0.500 0.15 s ★
time
F3-02 Acceleration rate 0.300–1.300 0.600 m/s2 ★
Acceleration start
F3-03 0.800–3.000 2.500 s ★
jerk time
Acceleration end
F3-04 0.800–3.000 2.500 s ★
jerk time
F3-05 Deceleration rate 0.300–1.300 0.600 m/s2 ★
Deceleration end
F3-06 0.800–3.000 2.500 s ★
jerk time
Deceleration start
F3-07 0.800–3.000 2.500 s ★
jerk time
Special
F3-08 0.800–1.500 0.900 m/s2 ★
deceleration rate
Pre-deceleration
F3-09 0–50.0 0.0 mm ★
distance
F3-10 Re-leveling speed 0.040–0.080 0.040 m/s ★
F3-11 Inspection speed 0.080–0.630 0.250 m/s ★
Low speed
F3-12 emergency 0.080 to F3-11 0.100 m/s ★
evacuation speed
Base floor
F3-13 0.100 to F0-04 0.500 m/s ★
verification speed
Emergency
F3-14 evacuation function 0–65535 32 - ★
selection
Normal speed
F3-15 emergency 0.080–0.500 0.080 m/s ★
evacuation speed
Acceleration rate
F3-16 at emergency 0.500–2.000 0.500 m/s2 ★
evacuation
Normal speed
F3-17 emergency 0–10 0 - ★
evacuation times
Zero-speed control
F3-18 0.000–1.000 0.200 s ★
time at startup
Brake release
F3-19 0.000–1.5.000 0.600 s ★
delay

- 106 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Zero-speed control
F3-20 0.000–1.000 0.300 s ★
time at end
F3-21 Brake apply delay 0.200–1.500 0.200s s ★
Group F4: Floor parameters
Leveling
F4-00 0–60 30 mm ★
adjustment
F4-01 Current floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
High byte of current
F4-02 0–65535 0 Pulses ●
floor position
Low byte of current
F4-03 0–65535 0 Pulses ●
floor position
Length 1 of leveling
F4-04 0–65535 0 mm ★
plate
Length 2 of leveling
F4-05 0–65535 0 mm ★
plate
F4-06 Leveling delay 0–80 28 ms ★
Down leveling
F4-07 0–60 30 mm ★
adjustment
High byte of floor
F4-10 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 1
Low byte of floor
F4-11 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 1
High byte of floor
F4-12 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 2
Low byte of floor
F4-13 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 2
High byte of floor
F4-14 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 3
Low byte of floor
F4-15 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 3
High byte of floor
F4-16 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 4
Low byte of floor
F4-17 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 4
High byte of floor
F4-18 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 5
Low byte of floor
F4-19 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 5
Floor height 6 to floor height 53
High byte of floor
F4-116 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 54

- 107 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Low byte of floor
F4-117 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 54
High byte of floor
F4-118 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 55
Low byte of floor
F4-119 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 55
Group F5: Terminal function parameters
0: Invalid
Load cell input 1: CTB digital input
F5-00 2 - ★
selection 2: CTB analog input
3: MCB analog input

X1 function 000: Invalid

F5-01 101 - ★
selection
001: Up leveling signal
X2 function 002: Down leveling signal
F5-02 102 - ★
selection 003: Door zone signal
004: Safety circuit feedback signal
X3 function
F5-03 005: Door lock circuit feedback 116 - ★
selection
signal
006: RUN contactor feedback
X4 function
F5-04 signal 117 - ★
selection
007: Brake contactor/Brake
X5 function detection switch feedback signal
F5-05 (allow repeat selection) 118 - ★
selection
108: Inspection signal (only NC)
X6 function 009: Inspection up signal
F5-06 119 - ★
selection
010: Inspection down signal
011: Fire emergency signal
X7 function
F5-07 112: Up limit signal (only NC) 0 - ★
selection
113: Down limit signal (only NC)
X8 function 014: Overload signal
F5-08 0 - ★
selection
015: Full-load signal
X9 function 116: Up slow-down 1 signal (only
F5-09 NC) 4 - ★
selection
117: Down slow-down 1 signal
X10 function (only NC)
F5-10 5 - ★
selection 118: Up slow-down 2 signal (only
NC)
X11 function 119: Down slow-down 2 signal
F5-11 106 - ★
selection (only NC)

X12 function
F5-12 (To be continued) 107 - ★
selection

- 108 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code

X13 function 121: Down slow-down 3 signal

F5-13 108 - ★
selection (only NC)
022: Shorting door lock circuit
X14 function contactor feedback
F5-14 9 - ★
selection
023: Firefighter switch signal
024: Door machine 1 light curtain
X15 function
F5-15 signal 10 - ★
selection
025: Door machine 2 light curtain
signal
X16 function
F5-16 026: Door machine 1 safety edge 112 - ★
selection
signal
X17 function 127: EPS valid signal
F5-17 113 - ★
selection 028: Elevator lock signal
029: Door machine 2 safety edge
X18 function signal
F5-18 0 - ★
selection
030: Shorting PMSM stator
feedback signal
X19 function
F5-19 032: Motor overheat signal 0 - ★
selection
033: VIP signal
X20 function 034: Earthquake signal
F5-20 0 - ★
selection 035: Security signal
036: Service floor switchover
X21 function
F5-21 037: Fire emergency floor 0 - ★
selection
switchover
X22 function 038: Parking floor switchover
F5-22 0 - ★
selection 039: Down collective selective
switch
X23 function 040: Peak service
F5-23 0 - ★
selection 041: Fire emergency start signal
042: Back door selection signal
X24 function
F5-24 043: Back door forbidden signal 0 - ★
selection
044: Light-load signal
X25 function 045: Half-load signal
F5-25 0 - ★
selection
046: Double door control signal
047: Motor input
X26 function
F5-26 Note: The value is a three-digit 0 - ★
selection
number. The hundred's digit
indicates the NO/NC type (1: NC,
X27 function
F5-27 0: NO), and the lowest two digits 0 - ★
selection
indicate the selected function.

X28 function
F5-28 (End) 0 - ★
selection

- 109 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
X29 function
F5-29 4 - ★
selection
0: Invalid
X30 function
F5-30 4: Safety circuit signal 5 - ★
selection
5: Door lock circuit signal
X31 function
F5-31 5 - ★
selection
0: Invalid
Y1 function
F5-32 1: RUN contactor control 1 - ★
selection
2: Brake contactor control
3: Shorting door lock circuit
Y2 function contactor control
F5-33 2 - ★
selection
4: Fire emergency floor arrival
signal feedback
Y3 function 5: Door machine 1 open
F5-34 3 - ★
selection 6: Door machine 1 close
7: Door machine 2 open
8: Door machine 2 close
Y4 function
F5-35 9: Brake and RUN contactors 4 - ★
selection
healthy
10: Fault state
Y5 function
F5-36 11: Running monitor 0 - ★
selection
12: Shorting PMSM stator
contactor
Y6 function
F5-37 13: Emergency evacuation 0 - ★
selection
automatic switchover
14: System healthy
Y7 function 15: Emergency buzzer control
F5-38 0 - ★
selection
16: Higher-voltage startup
of brake
Y8 function 17: Elevator running in up
F5-39 0 - ★
selection direction
18: Lamp/Fan running
19: Medical sterilization
Y9 function 20: Non-door zone stop
F5-40 0 - ★
selection
21: Electric lock
22: Non-service state
Group F6: Elevator logic parameters
Top floor of the
F6-00 F6-01 to 56 9 - ★
elevator

- 110 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Bottom floor of the
F6-01 1 to F6-00 1 - ★
elevator
F6-02 Parking floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
Fire emergency
F6-03 F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
floor
F6-04 Elevator lock floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
F6-05 Service floors 1 0–65535 65535 - ★
F6-06 Service floors 2 0–65535 65535 - ★
F6-07 Service floors 3 0–65535 65535 - ★
F6-08 Service floors 4 0–65535 65535 - ★
Bit0: Disability function
Bit1: Disabling returning to base
floor for verification
Bit2: Re-leveling function
Bit3: Door pre-open function
Bit4: Stuck hall call cancellation
Bit5: Peak service
Bit6: Down collective selective
peak service
Bit7: Fault auto reset
Bit8: Time-based service floor
Elevator function
F6-09 function 32768 - ★
selection 1
Bit9: Disabling reverse floor
number clear
Bit10: Buzzer not tweet upon re-
leveling
Bit11: Car call deletion
Bit12: Hall call deletion

Bit13: Timed elevator lock

Bit14: Arrival gong disabled at
night
Bit15: Reserved

- 111 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Bit0: Door open/close holding at
open limit
Bit1: Cancelling door open/close
command at a delay after door
open/close limit
Bit2: Cancelling door open/close
command cancelled immediately
at door open/close limit
Bit3: Not judging door lock state
at door close output
Bit4: Auto reset for RUN and
brake contactor stuck
Bit5: Forced door close
Bit6: Manual door
Bit7: Cancelling door lock auto-
Elevator function reset
F6-10 18 - ★
selection 2 Bit8: NO/NC output selection of
shorting PMSM stator contactor
Bit9: Door lock circuit contactor
output monitoring
Bit10: Cancelling overspeed
protection
Bit11: Car call executed first
Bit12: Car call assisted command
in single door used as disability
function
Bit13: Folding command used as
disability function and back door
function
Bit14: Car call command folding
Bit15: Higher/Low voltage 1.5s
time detection

- 112 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Bit0: Fire emergency display
Bit1: Firefighter operation display
Bit2: Direction display at micro-
leveling
Bit3: Determined direction display
in attendant state
Bit4: No direction display at
automatic stop
Bit5: Elevator lock at door open
Bit6: Display available at elevator
lock
Bit7: Elevator lock at any floor hall
call
Elevator function
F6-11 Bit8: Clear floor number in 0 - ★
selection 3
advance
Bit9: Clear floor number in
advance in attendant state
Bit10: Displaying next arriving
floor number
Bit11: Blinking at arrival
Bit12: Door re-open during door
open delay
Bit13: Door re-open after car call
of the present floor
Bit14: Door re-open at door close
limit
Bit15: Reserved
Blinking advance
F6-12 0.0–15.0 2.0 s ☆
time
Parking floor 2 start
F6-13 00.00–23.59 0 - ★
time
Parking floor 2 end
F6-14 00.00–23.59 0 - ★
time
F6-15 Parking floor 2 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
Fire emergency
F6-16 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
floor 2

- 113 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Bit0: Fire emergency 1 door 1
valid
Bit1: Fire emergency 1 door 2
valid
Bit2: Nearest floor for fire
emergency
Bit3: Opposite door control
unchanged
Fire emergency Bit4: Reserved
F6-17 1283 - ★
function selection 1 Bit5: Retentive at power failure
Bit6 to Bit7: Reserved
Bit8: Fire emergency indicator
blinking at fire emergency 1
Bit9: Fire emergency indicator
steady ON at fire emergency 1
Bit10: Fire emergency tone
discontinuous prompt at fire
emergency 1
Bit0: Fire emergency 2 door 1
valid
Bit1: Fire emergency 2door 2 valid
Bit2: Entering firefighter operation
state automatically
Bit3: Firefighter switch
Bit4: Fire emergency switch
switchover
Bit5 to Bit6: Reserved
Fire emergency
F6-18 1291 - ★
function selection 2 Bit7: Low speed door close
Bit8: Fire emergency indicator
blinking at fire emergency 2
Bit9: Fire emergency indicator
steady ON at fire emergency 2
Bit10: Fire emergency tone
prompt at intervals at fire
emergency 2
Bit11: Exiting fire emergency at
any floor

- 114 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Bit0: Nearest call mode
Bit1: First call mode
Bit2: Last call mode
Bit3 to Bit4: Reserved
Bit5: Call registered by holding
down button
Bit6: Closing door by holding
down the door close button
Bit7: Reserved
Fire emergency Bit8: Door close at car call active
F6-19 17156 - ★
function selection 3 Bit9: Reserved
Bit10: Reserved
Bit11: Automatic door open at
arrival
Bit12: Reserved
Bit13: Reserved
Bit14: Opening door by holding
down the door open button
Bit15: Automatic door open after
arrival at fire emergency floor
Elevator lock start
F6-22 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
time
Elevator lock end
F6-23 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
time
Bit0: Calls cancelled after entering
attendant state
Bit1: Not responding to hall calls
Bit2: Attendant/Automatic state
Attendant function switchover
F6-24 0 - ★
selection
Bit3: Door close at jogging
Bit4: Automatic door close
Bit5: Buzzer tweeting at intervals
in attendant state
Attendant/
F6-25 Automatic 0–200 0 s ★
switchover time
Emergency
F6-26 evacuation time 30–600 45 s ★
limit

- 115 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Bit0: Door 1 valid
Bit1: Door 2 valid
Bit2: Emergency evacuation time
protection
Bit3: Manual control
Bit4: Buzzer tweeting
Emergency
F6-27 evacuation function Bit5: HCB output 3 - ★
selection Bit6: Shorting stator braking mode
switched over to controller drive
Bit7: Mode of shorting stator
braking mode switched over to
controller drive
Bit8: Emergency evacuation exit
mode
Bit0: Fire emergency prompt in
inspection state
Bit1: Door lock disconnected
after inspection switched over to
Inspection function normal running
F6-28 33 - ★
selection
Bit2 to Bit4: Reserved
Bit5: Door open and close once
after inspection turned to normal
or first-time power-on
Bit0: VIP1 function
Bit1: VIP2 function
Bit2: VIP enabled by hall call (at
VIP floor)
Bit3: VIP enabled by button at VIP
floor
Bit4: VIP enabled by terminal
Bit5: VIP enabled by button at any
floor
VIP function
F6-30 Bit6: VIP enabled by car call 0 - ★
selection
Bit7: Security floor auto enable
Bit8: Number of VIP car calls
limited
Bit9: VIP auto exit
Bit10 to Bit13: Reserved
Bit13: Hall call saved
Bit14: Auto door close
Bit15: Reserved
F6-31 VIP floor 1 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
F6-32 VIP floor 2 0 to F6-00 0 - ★

- 116 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
F6-33 VIP auto exit time 0–200 0 s ★
Start time of time-
F6-35 based floor service 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
1
End time of time-
F6-36 based floor service 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
1
Service floors 1 of
F6-37 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 1
Service floors 2 of
F6-38 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 1
Service floors 3 of
F6-39 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 1
Service floors 4 of
F6-40 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 1
Start time of time-
F6-41 based floor service 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
2
End time of time-
F6-42 based floor service 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
2
Service floors 1 of
F6-43 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 2
Service floors 2 of
F6-44 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 2
Service floors 3 of
F6-45 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 2
Service floor 4 of
F6-46 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 2
Start time of time-
F6-47 based floor service 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
3
End time of time-
F6-48 based floor service 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
3

- 117 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Service floors 1 of
F6-49 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 3
Service floors 2 of
F6-50 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 3
Service floors 3 of
F6-51 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 3
Service floors 4 of
F6-52 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 3
Group F7: Intelligent commissioning parameters
Car call floor
F7-00 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
registered
Up call floor
F7-01 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
registered
Down call floor
F7-02 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
registered
Random running
F7-03 0–60000 0 - ☆
times
0: Yes
F7-04 Hall call enabled 0 - ☆
1: No
0: Yes
F7-05 Door open enabled 0 - ☆
1: No
0: Disabled
F7-06 Overload function 0 - ☆
1: Enabled
0: Enabled
F7-07 Limit switch 0 - ☆
1: Disabled
Time interval of
F7-08 0–1000 0 s ☆
random running
Accumulative
F7-09 energy 0–65535 0 kW ●
consumption
Accumulative
F7-10 0–65535 0 kW ●
feedback energy
Commissioning 0: No operation
F7-26 0 - ★
function selection 1: Shaft auto-tuning
Group F8: Auxiliary logic parameters
Load for load cell
F8-00 0–100 0 % ★
auto-tuning

- 118 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Pre-torque 0: Invalid
F8-01 0 - ★
selection 1: Valid
F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0–100.0 50.0 % ★
F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
F8-05 Load cell data 0–255 0 - ●
No-load load
F8-06 0–255 0 - ★
threshold
Full-load load
F8-07 0–255 100 - ★
threshold
0: Anti-nuisance function disabled
1: Nuisance judged by load cell
Anti-nuisance 2: Nuisance judged by light
F8-08 0 - ☆
function curtain
4: Nuisance judged by light-load
signal
F8-09 Rated elevator load 300–9999 1000 kg ★
Logic program Bit13: Hiding uncommon
F8-10 0 - ★
control parameters
0–127
F8-14 Local address 1 - ★
0: broadcast address
Overload
F8-18 100–130 110 % ★
percentage
Full-load
F8-19 70–110 80 % ★
percentage
Light-load
F8-20 10–50 30 % ★
percentage
Arrival gong
F8-21 0–10.0 1.0 s ★
advance time
Delay upon door
F8-22 0–2000 1000 ms ★
open limit
Command 2 start
F8-24 0–56 0 - ★
address
Group F9: Time parameters
Idle time before
F9-00 returning to base 0–240 10 min ★
floor
Time for fan and
F9-01 lamp to be turned 0–240 2 min ★
off

- 119 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Motor running time
F9-02 0–45 45 s ★
limit
Accumulative
F9-03 0–65535 0 h ●
working hours
Accumulative
F9-04 0–65535 0 h ●
running hours
Accumulative
F9-05 0–65535 0 day ●
working days
High byte of
F9-06 0–9999 0 - ●
running times
Low byte or
F9-07 0–9999 0 - ●
running times
F9-12 Clock: year 2000–2100 2010 YYYY ☆
Clock: month and
F9-13 1.01–12.31 301 MM.DD ☆
day
Clock: hour and
F9-14 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ☆
minute
Group FA: Auxiliary parameters
Group FA security
FA-00 0–65535 01000 - ●
password
Display in running
FA-01 1–65535 65535 - ☆
state
Display in stop
FA-02 1–65535 4095 - ☆
state
FA-03 Product SN 1–7000 5000 - ●
Software version 1
FA-04 0–65535 0 - ●
(CTB)
Software version 2
FA-05 0–65535 0 - ●
(MCB)
Software version
FA-06 3 (drive board 0–65535 0 - ●
software)
Heatsink
FA-07 0–100 0 °C ●
temperature
Bit0: Overload protection
Protection function
FA-09 Bit1: Output phase loss protection 3 - ★
selection
Bit3: Input phase loss protection
Overload
FA-10 protection 0.50–10.00 1.00 - ★
coefficient
Overload pre-
FA-11 50–100 80 % ★
warning coefficient

- 120 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Bit0: Super short floor function
Bit1: Up slow-down not reset for
super short floor
Bit2: Down slow-down not reset
for super short floor
Program control
FA-15 Bit3: Cancelling monitoring at 0 - ★
selection
leveling and slow-down
Bit4: Slow-down stuck detection
Bit5: Canceling 45s time limit at
shaft auto-tuning
Bit6: Leveling adjustment
Group Fb: Door function parameters
Number of door
Fb-00 1–2 1 - ★
machine(s)
Door function
Fb-01 0–65535 0 - ●
selection
Service floors 1 of
Fb-02 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door machine 1
Service floors 2 of
Fb-03 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door machine 1
Service floors 3 of
Fb-04 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door machine 1
Service floors 4 of
Fb-05 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door machine 1
Service floors 1 of
Fb-06 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door machine 2
Service floors 2 of
Fb-07 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door machine 2
Service floors 3 of
Fb-08 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door machine 2
Service floors 4 of
Fb-09 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door machine 2
Door open
Fb-10 5–99 10 s ☆
protection time
Forced door close
Fb-11 5–99 15 s ☆
time
Door close
Fb-12 5–99 15 s ☆
protection time
Fb-13 Door re-open times 0–20 0 - ☆

- 121 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
0: Closing the door as normal at
base floor
Door state of 1: Waiting with door open at base
Fb-14 0 - ★
standby elevator floor
2: Waiting with door open at each
floor
Door open holding
Fb-15 1–30 5 s ☆
time for hall call
Door open holding
Fb-16 1–30 3 s ☆
time for car call
Door open holding
Fb-17 1–30 10 s ☆
time at base floor
Fb-18 Door open delay 10–30000 30 s ☆
Special door open
Fb-19 10–1000 30 s ☆
holding time
Manual door open
Fb-20 1–60 10 s ☆
holding time
Group FC: Brief fault information
FC-00 Designated fault 0–99 0 - ☆
FC-01 20th fault code 0–6299 0 - ●
FC-02 20th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
20th fault month
FC-03 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
20th fault hour and
FC-04 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
minute
20th fault
FC-05 0–65535 0 - ●
information
FC-06 19th fault code 0–6299 0 - ●
FC-07 19th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
19th fault month
FC-08 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
19th fault hour and
FC-09 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
minute
19th fault
FC-10 0–65535 0 - ●
information
FC-11 18th fault code 0–6299 0 - ●
FC-12 18th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
18th fault month
FC-13 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
18th fault hour and
FC-14 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
minute

- 122 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
18th fault
FC-15 0–65535 0 - ●
information
FC-16 17th fault code 0–6299 0 - ●
FC-17 17th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
17th fault month
FC-18 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
17th fault hour and
FC-19 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
minute
17th fault
FC-20 0–65535 0 - ●
information
FC-21 16th fault code 0–6299 0 - ●
FC-22 16th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
16th fault month
FC-23 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
16th fault hour and
FC-24 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
minute
16th fault
FC-25 0–65535 0 - ●
information
FC-26 15th fault code 0–6299 0 - ●
FC-27 15th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
15th fault month
FC-28 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
15th fault hour and
FC-29 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
minute
15th fault
FC-30 0–65535 0 - ●
information
FC-31 14th fault code 0–6299 0 - ●
FC-32 14th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
14th fault month
FC-33 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
14th fault hour and
FC-34 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
minute
14th fault
FC-35 0–65535 0 - ●
information
FC-36 13th fault code 0–6299 0 - ●
FC-37 13th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
13th fault month
FC-38 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
13th fault hour and
FC-39 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
minute

- 123 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
13th fault
FC-40 0–65535 0 - ●
information
FC-41 12th fault code 0–6299 0 - ●
FC-42 12th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
12th fault month
FC-43 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
12th fault hour and
FC-44 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
minute
12th fault
FC-45 0–65535 0 - ●
information
FC-46 11th fault code 0–6299 0 - ●
FC-47 11th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
11th fault month
FC-48 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
11th fault hour and
FC-49 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
minute
11th fault
FC-50 0–65535 0 - ●
information
Group Fd: Parallel/Group control parameters
Number of
elevators in
Fd-00 1–3 1 - ★
parallel/group
mode
Fd-01 Elevator No. 1–3 1 - ★
0: Parallel control
Parallel/Group 1: Reserved
Fd-02 0 - ★
control mode 2: Group control of traditional
mode
Group FE: Display parameters

FE-01 Floor 1 display 00: Display "0" 1901 - ★

01: Display "1"
02: Display "2"
FE-02 Floor 2 display 1902 - ★
03: Display "3"
04: Display "4"
FE-03 Floor 3 display 05: Display "5" 1903 - ★

06: Display "6"

07: Display "7"
08: Display "8"
FE-04 Floor 4 display 1904 - ★

(To be continued)

- 124 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code

FE-05 Floor 5 display 1905 - ★

09: Display "9"
10: Display "A"
FE-06 Floor 6 display 11: Display "B" 1906 - ★
12: Display "G"
13: Display "H"
FE-07 Floor 7 display 1907 - ★
14: Display "L"
15: Display "M"
FE-08 Floor 8 display 16: Display "P" 1908 - ★

17: Display "R"

FE-09 Floor 9 display 18: Display "-" 1909 - ★
19: No display
FE-10 Floor 10 display 20: Display "12" 0100 - ★
21: Display "13"
FE-11 Floor 11 display 22: Display "23" 0101 - ★
23: Display "C"
FE-12 Floor 12 display 24: Display "D" 0102 - ★
25: Display "E"
FE-13 to Floor 13 to floor 52 26: Display "F" 0103 to
- ★
FE-52 display 27: Display "I" 0502
28: Display "J"
FE-53 Floor 53 display 0503 - ★
29: Display "K"
30: Display "N"
FE-54 Floor 54 display 0504 - ★
31: Display "O"
32: Display "Q"
FE-55 Floor 55 display 33: Display "S" 0505 - ★

34: Display "T"

FE-56 Floor 56 display 35: Display "U" 0506 - ★
36: Display "V"
Highest digit
FE-61 37: Display "W" 0 - ★
display 1
38: Display "X"
Highest digit
FE-62 39: Display "Y" 0 - ★
display 2
40: Display "Z"
Highest digit 41: Display "15"
FE-63 0 - ★
display 3
42: Display "17"
Highest digit 43: Display "19"
FE-64 0 - ★
display 4

Highest digit (End)

FE-65 0 - ★
display 5

- 125 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Group FH: Close-loop parameters
Group FH security
FH-00 0–65535 01000 - ●
password
0: SIN/COS encoder, absolute
encoder
FH-01 Encoder type 0 - ★
1: UVW encoder
4: ABZ incremental encoder
Encoder pulses per
FH-02 0–10000 2048 PPR ★
revolution
Encoder wire-
FH-03 breaking detection 0–10.0 2.1 s ★
time
Encoder
initial angle Degree
FH-04 0.0–359.9 0 ★
(synchronous (°)
motor)
Encoder
current angle Degree
FH-05 0.0–359.9 0.0 ●
(synchronous (°)
motor)
FH-06 Wiring mode 0–15 0 - ★
FH-08 Zero drift 1 0–65535 0 - ★
FH-09 Zero drift 2 0–65535 0 - ★
FH-10 Zero drift 3 0–65535 0 - ★
FH-11 Zero drift 4 0–65535 0 - ★
Position of up slow-
FH-17 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
down 1
Position of down
FH-18 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
slow-down 1
Position of up slow-
FH-19 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
down 2
Position of down
FH-20 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
slow-down 2
Position of up slow-
FH-21 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
down 3
Position of down
FH-22 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
slow-down 3
Position switch
FH-29 0–200 0 ms ★
signal delay
Group FL: Extension terminal function parameters
FL-00 CTB input type 0–511 320 - ★

- 126 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code

FL-01 HCB-B:JP1 input 0: Invalid 0 - ★

1: Light-load signal
FL-02 HCB-B:JP2 input 2: Half-load signal 0 - ★
3: Door 2 selection
FL-03 HCB-B:JP3 input 4: Door 2 restricted 0 - ★
5: Door 1 safety edge
FL-04 HCB-B:JP4 input 0 - ★
6: Door 2 safety edge
FL-05 HCB-B:JP5 input 7: Single/Double door selection 0 - ★
8: Fire emergency floor switchover
FL-06 HCB-B:JP6 input 9: Fire emergency start signal 0 - ★

FL-07 HCB-B:A1 output 0 - ★

0: Invalid
FL-08 HCB-B:A2 output 0 - ★
1: Fault output
FL-09 HCB-B:B1 output 2: Non-door zone stop output 0 - ★
FL-10 HCB-B:B2 output 3: Non-service state output 0 - ★
FL-11 HCB-B:C1 output 4: Fire emergency output 0 - ★
FL-12 HCB-B:C2 output 5: Power failure emergency output 0 - ★
FL-13 HCB-B:C3 output 6: Door lock valid 0 - ★
FL-14 HCB-B:C4 output 7: Night output signal 0 - ★
8: Fire emergency indicator
FL-15 HCB-B:C5 output 0 - ★
9: Fire emergency tone
FL-16 HCB-B:C6 output 0 - ★
1: Elevator lock signal
2: Fire emergency signal
3: Current floor forbidden
FL-17 HCB:JP1 input 1 - ★
4: VIP floor signal
5: Security floor signal
6: Service floor switchover
7: Parking floor switchover
8: Down collective selective
switch
FL-18 HCB:JP2 input 2 - ★
9: Peak service switch
10: Fire emergency floor
switchover
0: Invalid
FL-19 HCB:JP1 output 1: Up arrival indicator 1 - ★
2: Down arrival indicator
3: Fault output
4: Non-door zone stop output
FL-20 HCB:JP2 output 5: Non-service state output 2 - ★
6: Buzzer output

- 127 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Group Fr: Leveling adjustment parameters
Leveling 0: Disabled
Fr-00 adjustment 0 - ★
function 1: Enabled

Leveling
Fr-01 to
adjustment record 00000–60060 30030 mm ★
Fr-28
1 to 28
Group FU: Monitoring parameters
FU-03 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0.0 % ●
FU-04 Logic information 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-05 Curve information 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-06 Speed reference 0.000–8.000 0 m/s ●
FU-07 Feedback speed 0.000–8.000 0 m/s ●
FU-08 Bus voltage 0–999.9 0 V ●
FU-09 Output voltage 0–999.9 0 V ●
FU-10 Output current 0–655.00 0 A ●
FU-11 Output frequency 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
FU-12 Torque current 0.0–200.0 0 % ●
FU-13 Output torque 0–655.00 0 A
FU-14 Output power 0.00–99.99 0 kW ●
FU-15 Present position 0.00–300.00 0 m ●
Communication
FU-16 0–65535 0 - ●
interference
Encoder
FU-17 0–65535 0 - ●
interference
FU-18 Input state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-19 Input state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-20 Input state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-22 Input state 5 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-23 Output state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-24 Output state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-25 Output state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-26 Car input state 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-27 Car output state 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-28 Hall sate 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-29 System state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-30 System state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-31 Current car load 0–255 0 - ●

- 128 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Nearest landing
FU-32 1–56 0 - ●
floor
FU-33 Destination floor 1–56 0 - ●
FU-34 Stop time 0.0–60.0 0 s ●
Deceleration
FU-35 0.0–100.0 0 s ●
distance
Mod1
FU-49 communication 0–65535 0 - ●
state 1
Mod1
FU-50 communication 0–65535 0 - ●
state2
Mod1
FU-51 communication 0–65535 0 - ●
state 3
Mod1
FU-52 communication 0–65535 0 - ●
state 4
Mod2
FU-53 communication 0–65535 0 - ●
state 1
Mod2
FU-54 communication 0–65535 0 - ●
state 2
Mod2
FU-55 communication 0–65535 0 - ●
state 3
Mod2
FU-56 communication 0–65535 0 - ●
state 4
Group FF: Factory parameters
Group FP: User parameters
FP-00 User password 0–65535 0 - ☆
0: No operation
1: Restore default settings
FP-01 Parameter update 2: Clear fault records 0 - ★
3: Restore logic board parameters
4: Restore all parameter setting
User-defined 0: Invalid
FP-02 0 - ★
parameter display 1: Valid
Group E0: 1st fault details
E0-00 1st fault code 0–6299 0 - ●

- 129 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
E0-01 1st fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
1st fault month and
E0-02 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
day
1st fault hour and
E0-03 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
minute
1st fault logic
E0-04 0–65535 0 - ●
information
1st fault curve
E0-05 0–65535 0 - ●
information
Speed reference
E0-06 0.000–8.000 0 m/s ●
upon 1st fault
Feedback speed
E0-07 0.000–8.000 0 m/s ●
upon 1st fault
Bus voltage upon
E0-08 0–999.9 0 V ●
1st fault
Output voltage
E0-09 0–999.9 0 V ●
upon 1st fault
Output current
E0-10 0–655.00 0 A ●
upon 1st fault
Output frequency
E0-11 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
upon 1st fault
Output torque upon
E0-12 0–100 0 % ●
1st fault
Torque current
E0-13 0–655.00 0 A ●
upon 1st fault
Output power upon
E0-14 0.00–99.99 0 kW ●
1st fault
Present position
E0-15 0.00–300.00 0 m ●
upon 1st fault
Communication
E0-16 interference upon 0–65535 0 - ●
1st fault
Encoder
E0-17 interference upon 0–65535 0 - ●
1st fault
Input state 1 upon
E0-18 0–65535 0 - ●
1st fault
Input state 2 upon
E0-19 0–65535 0 - ●
1st fault
Input state 3 upon
E0-20 0–65535 0 - ●
1st fault
Input state 4 upon
E0-21 0–65535 0 - ●
1st fault

- 130 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 6 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Input state 5 upon
E0-22 0–65535 0 - ●
1st fault
Output state 1
E0-23 0–65535 0 - ●
upon 1st fault
Output state 2
E0-24 0–65535 0 - ●
upon 1st fault
Output state 3
E0-25 0–65535 0 - ●
upon 1st fault
Car input state
E0-26 0–65535 0 - ●
upon 1st fault
Car output state
E0-27 0–65535 0 - ●
upon 1st fault
Hall sate upon 1st
E0-28 0–65535 0 - ●
fault
System state 1
E0-29 0–65535 0 - ●
upon 1st fault
System state 2
E0-30 0–65535 0 - ●
upon 1st fault
Car load upon 1st
E0-31 0–255 0 - ●
fault
Group E1 to E9: details of the later 9 faults, defined same as group E0

- 131 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Function Code Table NICE7000 User Manual

- 132 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7
Description of Function Codes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Chapter 7 Description of Function Codes

Group F0: Basic Parameters

Function Parameter
Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code Name
0: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
F0-00 Control mode 1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC) 1 - ★
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control

It is used to set the control mode of the system.

•• 0: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
It is applicable to low-speed running during no-load commissioning of the asynchronous
motor, fault judgment at inspection, and synchronous motor running on special
conditions.
•• 1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
It is applicable to normal running in distance control.
•• 2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
It is applicable to equipment detection.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Command source 0: Operation panel control

F0-01 1 - ★
selection 1: Distance control

It is used to set the source of running commands and running speed references.
•• 0: Operation panel control
STOP
The controller is operated by pressing RUN and on the operation panel, and
RES

the running speed is set by F0-02 (Running speed under operation panel control). This
method is applicable only to the test or motor no-load auto-tuning.
•• 1: Distance control
This method is used in the NICE series integrated elevator controller. During inspection,
the elevator runs at the speed set in F3-11. During normal running, the controller
automatically calculates the speed and running curve for the elevator based on the
distance between the current floor and the target floor within the rated elevator speed,
implementing direct travel ride.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Running speed under
F0-02 0.050 to F0-04 0.050 m/s ☆
operation panel control

- 134 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

It is used to set the running speed in the operation panel control mode.
Note that this function is enabled only when F0-01 is set to 0 (Operation panel control). You
can change the running speed of the elevator by modifying this parameter during running

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F0-03 Maximum running speed 0.100 to F0-04 1.600 m/s ★

It is used to set the actual maximum running speed of the elevator. The value must be
smaller than the rated elevator speed.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F0-04 Rated elevator speed 0.100–4.000 1.600 m/s ★

It is used to set the norminal rated speed of the elevator. The value of this parameter is
dependent on the elevator mechanism and traction motor.

Note

F0-03 is the actual running speed within the elevator speed range set in F0-04. For example, for a
certain elevator, if F0-04 is 1.750 m/s and the actually required maximum running speed is 1.600
m/s, set F0-03 to 1.600 m/s.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F0-05 Elevator running direction 0–1 0 - ★

It is used to set the elevator running direction.

The values are as follows:
•• 0: Direction unchanged
•• 1: Direction reversed
Modify this parameter to reverse the running direction (without changing the wiring of the
motor).
When you perform inspection running for the first time after motor auto-tuning is successful,
check whether the actual motor running direction is consistent with the inspection command
direction. If not, change the motor running direction by setting F0-05 to consistent with the
inspection command direction.
Pay attention to the setting of this parameter when restoring the default setting.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F0-07 Carrier frequency 2.0–16.0 8.0 kHz ★

It is used to set the carrier frequency of the controller.

The carrier frequency is closely related to the motor noise during running. When it is
generally set above 6 kHz, mute running is achieved. It is recommended to set the carrier

- 135 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

frequency to the lowest within the allowable noise, which reduces the controller loss and
radio frequency interference.
If the carrier frequency is low, output current has high harmonics, and the power loss and
temperature rise of the motor increase.
If the carrier frequency is high, power loss and temperature rise of the motor declines.
However, the system has an increase in power loss, temperature rise and interference.
Adjusting the carrier frequency will exert influences on the aspects listed in the following
table.
Table 7-1 Influences of carrier frequency adjustment

Carrier frequency Low High

Motor noise Large Small
Output current waveform Bad Good
Motor temperature rise High Low
Controller temperature rise Low High
Leakage current Small Large
External radiation interference Small Large

Note

On certain environment conditions (the heatsink temperature is too high), the system will reduce
the carrier frequency to provide overheat protection for the controller, preventing the controller
from being damaged due to overheat. If the temperature cannot reduce in this case, the controller
reports the overheat fault.

Group F1: Motor Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F1-00 Group F1 security password 0–65535 01000 - ●

You are allowed to view and modify group F1 parameters only after entering the security
password.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Model
F1-01 Rated motor power 1.1–132.0 kW ★
dependent
F1-02 Rated motor voltage 50–600 380 V ★
F1-03 Rated motor current 0.00–655.00 25 A ★
F1-04 Rated motor frequency 0.00–99.00 50 Hz ★
F1-05 Rated motor speed 0–3000 1460 RPM ★

Set these parameters according to the motor nameplate.

Each time F1-01 is changed, F1-06 to F1-10 are restored to the default setting for the

- 136 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

asynchronous motor but keep the same for the PMSM.

Ensure that these motor parameters are set correctly. Incorrect setting affects the motor
auto-tuning and the vector control effect.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F1-06 Stator resistance 0.000–65.000 0.000 Ω ★
F1-07 Rotor resistance 0.000–65.000 0.000 Ω ★
F1-08 Leakage inductance 0.00–650.00 2.34 mH ★
F1-09 Mutual inductance 0.1–3000.0 66.6 mH ★
F1-10 Magnetizing current 0.01–650.00 10.7 A ★

These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. After the motor auto-tuning
is completed successfully, the values of these parameters are updated automatically.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode 2: No-load auto-tuning 0 - ★
3: Current loop parameter
identification (only for
synchronous motor)

It is used to select the auto-tuning mode.

•• 1: With-load auto-tuning
It is static auto-tuning for the asynchronous motor and rotary auto-tuning for the
synchronous motor.
•• 2: No-load auto-tuning
It is complete auto-tuning, by which all motor parameters can be obtained.
•• 3: Parameter identification
When F1-11 is set to 2 (No-load auto-tuning), the motor must be completely
disconnected from the load; otherwise, the auto-tuning effect will be affected.
When "TUNE" is displayed on the operation panel, you need to manually release
the brake before starting auto-tuning. For details on the auto-tuning process, see the
description in section 5.4.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Min. Unit Property
Angle-free auto-tuning Bit1: Angle-auto-
F1-12 0 - ★
function selection tuning-free

When Bit1 =1, motor auto-tuning is not required, because the inspection running process at
first-time power-on includes the motor auto-tuning process.
Ensure that motor phase sequence and encoder wiring are correct.

- 137 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F1-13 Motor auto-tuning current 30–150 60 % ★

It sets the maximum current during synchronous motor auto-tuning.

You need not modify it generally.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Shaft Q inductance
F1-15 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
(torque)
Shaft D inductance
F1-16 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
(excitation)
F1-17 Back EMF 0–65535 0 - ★

These parameters are related to the synchronous motor, and obtained by means of motor
auto-tuning.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

0: Asynchronous motor
F1-25 Motor type 1 - ★
1: Synchronous motor

It is used to set the motor type.

This parameter must be set correctly before motor auto-tuning; otherwise, the motor auto-
tuning cannot be performed.

Group F2: Vector Control Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F2-00 Speed loop proportional gain KP1 0–100 40 - ★
F2-01 Speed loop integral time TI1 0.01–10.00 0.60 s ★
F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz ★

F2-00 and F2-01 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is smaller than
the value of F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1).

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F2-03 Speed loop proportional gain KP2 1–100 35 - ★
F2-04 Speed loop integral time TI2 0.01–10.00 0.80 s ★
F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz ★

F2-03 and F2-04 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is larger than the
value of F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2).
If the running frequency is between F2-02 and F2-05, the speed loop PI parameters are
obtained from the weighted average value of the two groups of PI parameters (F2-00, F2-01
and F2-03, F2-04), as shown in Figure 7-1.

- 138 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Figure 7-1 Relationship between running frequencies and PI parameters

PI
parameters

F2-00
F2-01

F2-03
F2-04

F2-02 (Switchover F2-05 (Switchover Frequency

frequency 1) frequency 2) reference (Hz)

The speed dynamic response characteristics in vector control can be adjusted by setting the
proportional gain and integral time of the speed regulator.
To achieve a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral
time. Be aware that this may lead to system oscillation.
The recommended adjustment method is as follows:
The default setting meets the requirements of most applications. If the default setting cannot
meet the requirements (especially when the motor power is very small), the default speed
loop proportional gain may be a little large, and the motor oscillates at startup.
In this case, decrease the proportional gain first to ensure that the system does not oscillate,
and then reduce the integral time to ensure that the system has quick response but small
overshoot.
If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are 0, only F2-
03 and F2-04 are valid.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F2-06 Current loop KP1 (torque) 10–1000 60 - ★
F2-07 Current loop KI1 (torque) 10–1000 30 - ★

They are regulation parameters for the torque axis current loop.
These parameters are used as the torque axis current regulator in vector control. The most
appropriate values of the parameters matching the motor characteristics are obtained by
means of motor auto-tuning. You need not modify them generally.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F2-08 Torque upper limit 0.0–200.0 150.0 % ★

It is used to set the torque upper limit of the motor. The value 100% corresponds to the rated
output torque of the adaptable motor.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F2-09 Current loop KP2 (excitation) 10–1000 60 - ★

- 139 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F2-10 Current loop KI2 (excitation) 10–1000 30 - ★

They are parameters of the excitation axis current regulator.

These parameter are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. You need not modify them.
They take effect only in field weakening, and have little effect on improvement of motor
running.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

0: Invalid
F2-11 No-load-cell startup 0 - ★
1: Valid

It sets whether to perform automatic pre-torque compensation when there is no load cell.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F2-12 Position lock speed KP 1–100 35 - ☆
F2-13 Position lock speed KI 0.01–10.00 0.8 - ☆

These parameters are speed loop parameters when the no-load-startup function is used.
Decrease the values of these parameters in the case of car lurch at startup, and increase
the values in the case of rollback at startup.

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
F2-14 Position lock current loop KP1 (torque) 10–1000 60 - ☆
F2-15 Position lock current loop KI1 (torque) 10-1000 30 - ☆

They are regulation parameters for the torque axis in the case of no-load-cell.
The most appropriate values of these parameters matching the motor characteristics are
obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. You need not modify them generally.

Function Setting
Parameter Name Default Unit Property
Code Range
F2-16 Position lock current loop KP2 (excitation) 10–1000 60 - ☆
F2-17 Position lock current loop KI2 (excitation) 10-1000 30 - ☆

They are regulation parameters for the excitation axis current loop in the case of no-load-
cell.
These parameter are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. You need not modify them.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F2-18 Torque acceleration time 0–500 1 ms ★
F2-19 Torque deceleration time 0–500 350 ms ★

- 140 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

These two parameters are used to set the acceleration time and deceleration time of the
torque current.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F2-20 Current filter coefficient 0.00–40.00 0.00 - ★

It is used to set the current filter time, which suppress the periodic vertical jitter. Increase the
value in ascending order of 3 to achieve the optimum effect.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F2-21 Position lock rollback coefficient 0–9999 0 Pulses ●

It set the rollback pulses at startup.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F2-22 Startup acceleration time 0.000–1.500 0.000 s ★

It is used to set the acceleration time of the startup speed. It is used with F3-00. For details,
see Figure 7-2.

Group F3: Running Control Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 0.000 m/s ★
F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500 0.15 s ★

These two parameters are used to set the startup speed and startup speed holding time.
The parameters may reduce the terrace feeling at startup due to static friction between the
guide rail and the guide shoes.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

2
F3-02 Acceleration rate 0.300–1.300 0.600 m/s ★
F3-03 Acceleration start jerk time 0.800–3.000 2.500 s ★
F3-04 Acceleration end jerk time 0.800–3.000 2.500 s ★

These parameters are used to set the running curve during acceleration of the elevator.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

2
F3-05 Deceleration rate 0.300–1.300 0.600 m/s ★
F3-06 Deceleration end jerk time 0.800–3.000 2.500 s ★
F3-07 Deceleration start jerk time 0.800–3.000 2.500 s ★

These parameters are used to set the running curve during deceleration of the elevator.
F3-02 (F3-05) is the acceleration rate (deceleration rate) in the straight-line acceleration

- 141 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

process (deceleration process) of the S curve.

F3-03 (F3-07) is the time for the rate to increase from 0 to the value set in F3-02 (F3-05) in
the end jerk segment of the S curve. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk is.
F3-04 (F3-06) is the time for the rate to decrease from the value set in F3-02 (F3-05) to 0 in
the start jerk segment of the S curve. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk is.
Figure 7-2 Setting the running curve
V (speed)
F3-09
F3-04
F3-07

F3-02 F3-05

F3-06
F3-03

F3-01
F3-00

F2-22 t (time)

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F3-08 Special deceleration rate 0.800–1.500 0.900 m/s2 ★

It is used to set the deceleration rate in elevator slow-down, inspection, and shaft auto-
tuning.
This parameter is not used during normal running. It is used only when the elevator position
is abnormal or the slow-down signal is abnormal, preventing over travel top terminal or over
travel bottom terminal.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F3-09 Pre-deceleration distance 0–50.0 0.0 mm ★

It is used to set the pre-deceleration distance of the elevator in distance control, as shown in
Figure 7-2.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F3-10 Re-leveling speed 0.040–0.080 0.040 m/s ★

It is used to set the elevator speed during re-leveling.

This parameter is valid only when the pre-open module (MCTC-SCB-A) is added to
implement the re-leveling function (set in F6-09 Bit2 = 1).

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F3-11 Inspection speed 0.080–0.630 0.250 m/s ★

- 142 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

It is used to set the elevator speed during inspection and shaft auto-tuning.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Low speed emergency
F3-12 0.080 to F3-11 0.100 m/s ★
evacuation speed

It is used to set the elevator speed ruing low speed emergency evacuation.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F3-13 Base floor verification speed 0.100 to F0-04 0.500 m/s ★

It is used to set the elevator speed for base floor verification.

It is valid when the function of returning to base floor for verification at too large pulse
deviation is enabled (F6-09 Bit1 = 1).

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Emergency evacuation
F3-14 0–65535 32 - ★
function selection

It is used to select the emergency evacuation-related functions. Each bit of the function code
defines a function, as described in the following table.

Bit Function Description Remarks

Shorting stator braking mode
Shorting stator braking mode: Upon power
failure, EPS is used, the motor stator is
Emergency 1 -
shorted, and the brake is automatically
Bit0 evacuation exit
released, making the car move slowly
mode
under the effect of the weighing difference
between the car and the counterweight.
0 EPS -

Low voltage 1 48 VDC -

Bit1
drive 0 220 VAC and above -
1 Allowed This function is enabled
Normal speed
when the EPS capacity
Bit2 emergency
0 Forbidden is sufficient and the
evacuation
voltage is high enough.
Door open at 1 Allowed The door opens when a
Bit3 single leveling single leveling signal is
signal 0 Forbidden active.
Load
Bit4 0 0 direction 1 Landing -
Direction Automatically
determining at
determine calculating
based on nearest
mode the direction
Bit5 0 1 half-load 0 floor -
signal

- 143 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Bit Function Description Remarks

1 Stop at the base floor -
Bit6 Stop position
0 Stop at nearest landing floor -
Startup torque compensation valid in
Startup 1 -
Bit7 emergency evacuation running
compensation
0 Invalid -
Bit8 to Bit15: reserved

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Normal speed emergency
F3-15 0.080–0.500 0.080 m/s ★
evacuation speed
Acceleration rate at
F3-16 0.500–2.000 0.500 m/s2 ★
emergency evacuation

It is used to set the acceleration rate at emergency evacuation.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Normal speed emergency
F3-17 0–10 0 - ★
evacuation times

It is used to set the maximum normal speed emergency evacuation times allowed.
This parameter is valid only when normal speed emergency evacuation is allowed (F3-14
Bit2 = 1).

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F3-18 Zero-speed control time at startup 0.000–1.000 0.200 s ★
F3-19 Brake release delay 0.000–1.5.000 0.600 s ★
F3-20 Zero-speed control time at end 0.000–1.000 0.300 s ★
F3-21 Brake apply delay 0.200–1.500 0.200s s ★

These parameters are used to set the time related to the zero-speed holding current output
and braking action delay.
F3-18 (Zero-speed control time at startup) specifies the time from output of the RUN
contactor to output of the brake contactor, during which the controller performs excitation on
the motor and outputs zero-speed current with large startup torque.
F3-19 (Brake release delay) specifies the time from the moment when the system sends
the brake release command to the moment when the brake is completely released, during
which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
F3-20 (Zero-speed control time at end) specifies the zero-speed output time when the
running curve ends.
F3-21 (Brake apply delay) specifies the time from the moment when the system sends the
brake apply command to the moment when the brake is completely applied, during which
the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.

- 144 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Figure 7-3 Running time sequence

F3-20
V (speed) F3-19 F3-21
F3-18 F2-19

RUN contactor t (time)

Brake contactor
Shorting door lock
circuit contactor
Shorting motor
stator contactor
Internal
running status
Leveling signal
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor
feedback
Shorting door lock circuit
contactor feedback
Shorting motor
stator contactor

Group F4: Floor Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F4-00 Leveling adjustment 0–60 30 mm ★

It is used to adjust the leveling accuracy at elevator stop. If over-leveling occurs at all floors
during elevator stop, decrease the value of this parameter properly. If under-leveling occurs
at all floors during elevator stop, increase the value of this parameter properly.
This parameter takes effect to leveling of all floors. Therefore, if leveling at a single floor is
inaccurate, adjust the position of the leveling plate.
If the leveling deviations in up direction and down direction are inconsistent, adjust F4-07
additionally.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F4-01 Current floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★

This parameter indicates the current floor of the elevator car.

The system automatically changes the value of this parameter during running, and corrects
it at leveling position (door open limit) after the up slow-down and down slow-down switches
act. At non-bottom floor and top-floor leveling, you can also manually modify this parameter,
but the value must be consistent with the actual current floor.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F4-02 High byte of current floor position 0–65535 0 Pulses ●
F4-03 Low byte of current floor position 0–65535 0 Pulses ●

- 145 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

These two parameters indicate the absolute pulses of the current position of the elevator car
relative to the bottom leveling position.
The position data of the NICE7000 in the shaft is recorded in pulses. Each position is
expressed by a 32-bit binary number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the
floor position, and the low 16 bits indicate the low byte of the floor position.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F4-04 Length 1 of leveling plate 0–65535 0 mm ★
F4-05 Length 2 of leveling plate 0–65535 0 mm ★

These two parameters respectively indicate the pulses corresponding to the length of
the magnetic value and the length between two leveling sensors. They are automatically
recorded during shaft auto-tuning.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F4-06 Leveling delay 0–80 28 ms ★

It is used to set the delay time from action of the leveling sensor to the moment of leveling
signal active.
You need not modify it generally.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F4-07 Down leveling adjustment 0–60 30 mm ★

It is used to adjust the inaccurate leveling position.

•• F4-07 = 30, F4-00 is used for leveling adjustment.
•• F4-07 ≠ 30, F4-00 is used for up leveling adjustment, and F4-07 is used for down
leveling adjustment.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F4-10 High byte of floor height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-11 Low byte of floor height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
…(Floor height 2 to floor height 54)
F4-118 High byte of floor height 55 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-119 Low byte of floor height 55 0–65535 0 Pulses ★

These parameters indicate the pulses corresponding to the floor height i (between the
leveling plates of floor n and floor i+1). Each floor height is expressed by a 32-bit binary
number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the floor height, and the low 16 bits
indicate the low byte of the floor height. On normal conditions, the floor height i of each floor
is almost the same.

- 146 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Group F5: Terminal Function Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-00 Load cell input selection 0–3 2 - ★

It is used to set the channel of setting the elevator load cell signal. When a load cell device
is used, set this parameter correctly first.
The values are as follows:
•• 0: Invalid
•• 1: CTB digital input
•• 2: CTB analog input
•• 3: MCB analog input

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F5-01 X1 function selection 101 - ★
F5-02 X2 function selection 102 - ★
F5-03 X3 function selection 116 - ★
F5-04 X4 function selection 117 - ★
F5-05 X5 function selection 118 - ★
F5-06 X6 function selection 119 - ★
F5-07 X7 function selection 0 - ★
F5-08 X8 function selection 0 - ★
F5-09 X9 function selection 4 - ★
F5-10 X10 function selection 0–127 5 - ★
F5-11 X11 function selection 106 - ★
F5-12 X12 function selection 107 - ★
F5-13 X13 function selection 108 - ★
F5-14 X14 function selection 9 - ★
F5-15 X15 function selection 10 - ★
F5-16 X16 function selection 112 - ★
F5-17 X17 function selection 113 - ★
... ..
F5-28 X28 function selection 0 - ★

These parameters are used to set the functions of input terminals X1 to X24.

- 147 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Note

Functions 04 (Safety circuit feedback signal), 05 (Door lock circuit feedback signal), 06 (RUN
contactor feedback signal), and 07 (Brake contactor feedback signal) can be selected repeatedly.
The hundred's digit indicates the NO/NC type (1: NC, 0: NO), and the lowest two digits indicate
the selected function. For example, if X13 is used for inspection signal NC input, set F5-13 to 108;
if X14 is used for inspection up signal NO input, set F5-14 to 009.

Terminals X1 to X20 are digital inputs, and are allocated with corresponding functions
based on the input signals. After the 24 V voltage is input, the corresponding input terminal
indicator becomes ON. The functions are described as follows:
00: Invalid
Even if there is signal input to the terminal, the system has no response. You can allocate
this function to terminals that are not used to prevent mis-function.
01: Up leveling signal 02: Down leveling signal 03: Door zone signal
The NICE7000 system determines the elevator leveling position based on the leveling
sensor signal. The system supports three types of leveling configuration: single door zone
sensor, up and down leveling sensors, and door zone sensor plus the up/down leveling
sensor.
The following table describes the sequence of received signals for the three types of leveling
configurations.

Leveling Configuration Signal Receiving Sequence

Up leveling Down leveling Door zone
Up direction Down direction
sensor sensor sensor
No No Yes Door zone signal
Up leveling signal
Down leveling signal --->
Yes Yes No ---> Down leveling Up leveling signal
signal
Up leveling signal
Down leveling signal --->
Yes Yes Yes ---> Door zone signal Door zone signal ---> Up
---> Down leveling le veling signal
signal

If the leveling signal is abnormal (stuck or unavailable), the system reports fault Err22.
04: Safety circuit feedback signal 05: Door lock circuit feedback signal
The safety circuit is important to safe and reliable running of the elevator, and the door lock
circuit ensures that the hall door and car door are closed before the elevator starts to run.
Valid feedback signals of the safety circuit and door lock circuit are necessary to elevator
running.
It is recommended that these signals are set to NO input. If they are set to NC input, the
system considers the input active even though there is no input. In this case, the actual state
of the safety circuit cannot be detected, which may cause potential safety risks.
06: RUN contactor feedback signal 07: Brake contactor/Brake detection switch

- 148 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

feedback signal
The system sends commands to the RUN and brake contactors and automatically detects
the feedback from the RUN and brake contactors. If the commands and the feedback are
inconsistent, the system reports a fault.
108: Inspection signal 09: Inspection up signal 10: Inspection down signal
When the Automatic/Inspection switch is set to the Inspection position, the elevator enters
the inspection state; in this case, the system cancels all automatic running including the
automatic door operations. When the inspection up signal or inspection down signal is valid,
the elevator runs at the inspection speed.
11: Fire emergency signal
When the fire emergency switch is turned on, the elevator enters the fire emergency state,
and immediately cancels the registered hall calls and car calls. The elevator stops at the
nearest floor without opening the door, and then directly runs to the fire emergency floor and
automatically opens the door after arrival.
112: Up limit signal 113: Down limit signal
The up limit signal and down limit signal are used as the stop switches at the terminal floor
to prevent over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal when the elevator runs over
the leveling position of the terminal floor but does not stop.
14: Overload signal
When the elevator load exceeds 110% of the rated load during normal use, the elevator
enters the overload state. Then the overload buzzer beeps, the overload indicator in the
car becomes ON, and the elevator door keeps open. The overload signal becomes invalid
when the door lock is applied. If the running with 110% of the rated load is required during
inspection, you can set F7-06 to 1 to allow overload running (note that this function has
potential safety risks and use it with caution).
It is recommended that the overload signal be set to NC input. If it is set to NO, the system
cannot detect the overload state when the overload switch is damaged or the connection
is broken, and the elevator running in this case may cause potential safety risks. It is also
recommended that the up limit signal, down limit signal, and slow-down signal are set to NC
input.
15: Full-load signal
When the elevator load is 80% to 110% of the rated load, the HCB displays the full-load
state, and the elevator does not respond to hall calls.

Note

When terminal X on the MCB is used for input of the overload and full-load signals, ensure that
F5-36 has been set to 0.

116: Up slow-down 1 signal 117: Down slow-down 1 signal

118: Up slow-down 2 signal 119: Down slow-down 2 signal
120: Up slow-down 3 signal 121: Down slow-down 3 signal

- 149 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

The slow-down signals are used to enable the elevator to stop at the slow-down speed when
the car position is abnormal, which is an important method to guarantee elevator safety. The
system automatically records the positions of the switches in group FH during shaft auto-
tuning.
22: Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback
It is the feedback signal when the door lock circuit is shorted if the function of door pre-open
upon arrival or re-leveling at door open is enabled for the elevator configured with the pre-
open module. This is to ensure safety during the elevator running.
23: Firefighter switch signal
It is the firefighter switch signal and is used to enable the firefighter operation mode. After
the elevator returns to the fire emergency floor, the elevator enters the firefighter operation
state if the firefighter signal is active.
24: Door machine 1 light curtain signal 25: Door machine 2 light curtain signal
26: Door machine 1 safety edge signal 29: Door machine 2 safety edge signal
They are used to detect the light curtain signals of door machine 1 and door machine 2 (if
existing).
127: EPS valid signal
It is the emergency running signal at power failure. If it is active, it indicates that the elevator
is running for emergency evacuation at power failure. For more details, see section 5.5.1.
28: Elevator lock signal
If this signal is active, the elevator enters the locked state, returns to the elevator lock floor
and does not respond to any calls until the signal becomes inactive.
30: Shorting PMSM stator feedback signal
The shorting PMSM stator contactor protects the elevator from falling at high speed in the
case of brake failure. This signal is used to monitor whether the shorting PMSM stator
contactor is normal.
32: Motor overheat signal
If this signal remains active for more than 2s, the controller stops output and reports
fault Err39 to prompt motor overheat. After this signal becomes inactive, Err39 is reset
automatically and the system resumes to normal operation.
33: VIP signal
The elevator enters the VIP service state after this signal is active.
34: Earthquake signal
If this signal remains active for more than 2s, the elevator enters the earthquake stop state,
stops at the nearest landing floor and opens the door. Then the elevator starts running again
after the earthquake signal becomes inactive.
35: Security signal
If this signal is active, each time the elevator passes the security floor, it opens and closes
the door once, and then runs to the destination floor.

- 150 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

36: Service floor switchover

If this signal is active, the time-based service 1 remains valid.
37: Fire emergency floor switchover
The NICE7000 supports two fire emergency floors. Fire emergency floor 1 is the default
one. If this signal is active, the elevator stops at fire emergency floor 2.
38: Parking floor switchover
The NICE7000 supports two parking floors. Parking floor 1 is the default one. If this signal is
active, the elevator stops at parking floor 2.
Different parking floors can be set for different time periods. For details, see group F6
parameters.
39: Down collective selective switch
The system starts the down collective selective function when the start time set in group Fd
is reached or this signal is active.
40: Peak service
Within the peak service time set in group Fd, the system starts the peak service when the
number of car calls at the peak service floor exceeds 3 or this signal is active.
41: Fire emergency start signal
In this firefighter operation state, the elevator starts running when this signal is active.
It is used when there are special requirements for fire emergency running.
42: Back door selection signal 43: Back door forbidden signal
When opposite door control is used, these two signals are used to allow or forbid door 2.
44: Light-load signal 45: Half-load signal
It is used for allocation of elevators in parallel or group mode and nuisance judgment in the
anti-nuisance function.
46: Double door control signal
In opposite door control, if the back door is not forbidden, both doors open if this signal is
active.
47: Motor input
The group control system allocate calls to elevators in energy-saving principle when standby
power supply is used.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F5-29 X29 function selection 0: Invalid 4 - ★
F5-30 X30 function selection 4: Safety circuit signal 5 - ★
F5-31 X31 function selection 5: Door lock circuit signal 5 - ★

These parameters are used to set the functions of heavy-current detection input terminals
X29 to X31.

- 151 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

The functions 0, 4, and 5 can be repeatedly allocated to terminals. If X29 to X31 are not
used, cancel the setting of these parameters.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F5-32 Y1 function selection 1 - ★
F5-33 Y2 function selection 2 - ★
F5-34 Y3 function selection 3 - ★
F5-35 Y4 function selection 4 - ★
F5-36 Y5 function selection 0–22 0 - ★
F5-37 Y6 function selection 0 - ★
F5-38 Y7 function selection 0
F5-39 Y8 function selection 0
F5-40 Y9 function selection 0

These parameters are used to set the functions of output terminals Y1 to Y9.
Note that Y7 to Y9 are specialized for the NICE7000, and share a common point.
00: Invalid
The terminal has no function.
01: RUN contactor control 02: Brake contactor control 03: Shorting door lock circuit
contactor control
The terminal with one of these functions controls whether the contactor is opened or closed.
04: Fire emergency floor arrival signal feedback
In the fire emergency state, the system sends the feedback signal for monitoring after the
elevator stops at the fire emergency floor.
05: Door machine 1 open 06: Door machine 1 close 07: Door machine 2 open
08: Door machine 2 close
The terminal with one of these functions is used to control open and close of door 1 or 2.
09: Brake and RUN contactors healthy
When the brake and RUN contactors operate properly, the system sends the feedback
signal for monitoring.
10: Fault state
The terminal with the function has output when the system is in the level-3, level-4 or level-5
fault state.
11: Running monitor
The terminal with the function has output when the controller is running.
12: Shorting PMSM stator contactor
When the shorting PMSM stator contactor is applied in synchronous motor, the terminal with
the function is used to control whether the contactor is closed or opened. For details, see

- 152 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

section 5.5.1.
13: Emergency evacuation automatic switchover
When detecting that the bus voltage declines to a certain value after power failure occurs on
the mains supply, the controller outputs this signal and uses the EPS for temporary power
supply, implementing emergency evacuation running.
Only Y6 can be allocated with this function because the controller needs to depend on its
residual power to drive the relay at power failure of the mains supply.
14: Controller healthy
The terminal with the function has output when the controller operates properly.
15: Emergency buzzer control
The terminal with the function has output when the system is in the emergency evacuation
running state. The buzzer tweets to prompt.
16: Higher-voltage startup of brake
This function is used for the brake that keeps the release state with voltage reduction. The
terminal with this function keeps the output for a certain time to release the brake, and then
the voltage is reduced to keep the brake release state.
17: Elevator running in up direction
The terminal with the function has output when the elevator runs in the up direction.
18: Lamp/Fan running
It is used for the lamp/fan running output, the same as the energy saving control output of
the CTB.
19: Medical sterilization
It is used to control the output of the ultraviolet sterilizing lamp signal. After the elevator
stops running and the lamp/fan stops operating, the medical sterilization output is started.
20: Non-door zone stop
The terminal with this function has output when the elevator stops at the non-door zone.
21: Electric lock
It is used to control applying and releasing of the electric lock in the case of manual door.
22: Non-service state
It is output when the elevator is in the non-service state and cannot respond to hall calls.

Group F6: Elevator Logic Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-00 Top floor of the elevator F6-01 to 56 9 - ★
F6-01 Bottom floor of the elevator 1 to F6-00 1 - ★

These two parameters are used to set the top floor and bottom floor of the elevator,

- 153 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

determined by the number of actually installed leveling plates.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-02 Parking floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★

When the idle time of the elevator exceeds the value set in F9-00, the elevator returns to the
parking floor automatically.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-03 Fire emergency floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★

When entering the state of returning to the fire emergency floor, the elevator returns to this
floor.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-04 Elevator lock floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★

When entering the elevator lock state, the elevator returns to this floor.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-05 Service floors 1 0–65535 65535 - ★
F6-06 Service floors 2 0–65535 65535 - ★
F6-07 Service floors 3 0–65535 65535 - ★
F6-08 Service floors 4 0–65535 65535 - ★

These parameters are used to set the service floors among floors 1–56.
•• Service floors 1: floors 1–16
•• Service floors 2: floors 17–32
•• Service floors 3: floors 33–48
•• Service floors 4: floors 49–56
Whether service floors of a parameter are allowed is indicated by a 16-bit binary number.
The 16 bits respectively correspond to 16 floors from low to high. If a bit is set to 1, the
elevator will respond to calls of this floor; if this bit is set to 0, the elevator will not respond to
calls of this floor.
The following part takes F6-05 as an example to describe how to set the service floors.
F6-05 is enabled through bit addressing.
The 16 bits of the function code respectively correspond to 16 floors. If a bit is set to 1, the
elevator will respond to calls of this floor; if this bit is set to 0, the elevator will not respond to
calls of this floor.

- 154 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Figure 7-4 Converting binary value of F6-05 to decimal

Bit Addressing Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Binary Addressing 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 256 612 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Floor 1
Bit0 0: Floor 1 not in service
1 1: Floor 1 in service
Floor 2 Bit1 0: Floor 2 not in service
2 1: Floor 2 in service
Floor 3 Bit2 0: Floor 3 not in service
4 1: Floor 3 in service
Floor 4 Bit3 0: Floor 4 not in service
8 1: Floor 4 in service
Floor 5 Bit4 0: Floor 5 not in service
16 1: Floor 5 in service
Floor 6 Bit5 0: Floor 6 not in service
32 1: Floor 6 in service
Floor 7 Bit6 0: Floor 7 not in service
64 1: Floor 7 in service
Floor 8 Bit7 0: Floor 8 not in service
128 1: Floor 8 in service
Floor 9 Bit8 0: Floor 9 not in service
256 1: Floor 9 in service
Floor 10 Bit9 0: Floor 10 not in service
512 1: Floor 10 in service
Floor 11 Bit10 0: Floor 11 not in service
1024 1: Floor 11 in service
Floor 12 Bit11 0: Floor 12 not in service
2048 1: Floor 12 in service
Floor 13 Bit12 0: Floor 13 not in service
4096 1: Floor 13 in service
Floor 14 Bit13 0: Floor 14 not in service
8192 1: Floor 14 in service
Floor 15 Bit14 0: Floor 15 not in service
16384 1: Floor 16 in service
Floor 16 Bit15 0: Floor 16 not in service
32768 1: Floor 16 in service

Convert binary value to

Floor number indicated by
decimal, and set this decimal Meaning of the binary value
each bit
on the operation panel

Example:
If floors 2, 8, 9, and 12 of a 16-floor elevator need to be forbidden, and all other floors are in
service, we need to set Bit1, Bit7, Bit8, and Bit11 corresponding to floors 2, 8, 9, and 12 to
0, and set the other bits to 1, as shown in the following figure.
Bit Addressing Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Binary Addressing 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 256 612 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Floor 1
Bit0 = 1
1
Floor 2 Bit1 = 0
0 Forbidden
Floor 3 Bit2 = 1
4
Floor 4 Bit3 = 1
8
Floor 5 Bit4 = 1
16
Floor 6 Bit5 = 1
32
Floor 7 Bit6 = 1
64
Floor 8 Bit7 = 0
0 Forbidden
Floor 9 Bit8 = 0
0 Forbidden
Floor 10 Bit9 = 1
512
Floor 11 Bit10 = 1
1024
Floor 12 Bit11 = 0
0 Forbidden
Floor 13 Bit12 = 1
4096
Floor 14 Bit13 = 1
8192
Floor 15 Bit14 = 1
16384
Floor 16 Bit15 = 1
32768

Convert the binary value to decimal:

1 + 4 + 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 + 512 + 1024 + 4096 + 8192 + 16384 + 32768 = 63101

- 155 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Then, enter "63101" for F6-05 on the operation panel.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-09 Elevator function selection 1 0–65535 32816 - ★
F6-10 Elevator function selection 2 0–65535 18 - ★
F6-11 Elevator function selection 3 0–65535 0 - ★

These parameters are used to select the required elevator functions. Each bit of the function
code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.

Bit Function Description Default

F6-09 Elevator function selection 1
Bit0 Disability function It is used to enable or disable the disability function. 0
Disabling returning
The function of returning to base floor for verification
Bit1 to base floor for 0
due to large deviation of the car position is disabled.
verification
If the floor height is large or the car load is heavy, there
is a deviation between the car position and the floor sill
at arrival.
If this function is enabled, the elevator shorts the door
Bit2 Re-leveling function 0
lock signal through the door lock circuit contactor, and
performs re-leveling at a low speed with door open.
The door pre-open module needs to be used together
for this function.
During normal stop, when the elevator speed is smaller
than a certain value and the door zone signal is active,
the system shorts the door lock by means of the
Door pre-open shorting door lock circuit contactor and outputs the door
Bit3 0
function open signal, implementing door pre-open. This improves
the elevator use efficiency.
It requires use of a door pre-open module.
The system automatically identifies the state of the hall
Stuck hall call
Bit4 call buttons. If the state is abnormal, the system cancels 0
cancellation
the stuck hall call.
When there are a large number of calls at a floor in
Bit5 Peak service a certain period, the elevator returns to this floor and 0
waits.
Down collective This function is similar to the peak service except that
Bit6 selective peak the elevator responds to only down calls during the peak 0
service period.
The controller automatically resets the faults once every
Bit7 Fault auto reset 0
hour.

- 156 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Bit Function Description Default

It is used to enable the function of responding to
Time-based service different floor calls during different time periods.
Bit8 0
floor function
For details, see the description of F6-35 to F6-52.
The system clears all the current car calls every time
Disabling reverse the elevator changes the direction by default. When this
Bit9 0
floor number clear function is enabled, the function of clearing reverse floor
numbers is disabled.
Buzzer not tweet The buzzer inside the car does not tweet upon re-
Bit10 0
upon re-leveling leveling.
A car call can be deleted by pressing the corresponding
Bit11 Car call deletion button twice consecutively (at an interval of 0.5s). If the 1
call is being executed, it cannot be deleted.
A hall call can be deleted by pressing the hall call button
Bit12 Hall call deletion 0
twice consecutively (at an interval of 0.5s).
It is used to enable the timed elevator lock service.
Bit13 Timed elevator lock 0
The elevator lock time is set in F6-22.
Arrival gong disabled The arrival gong is disabled from 22:00 p.m. to 7:00
Bit14 0
at night a.m.
Bit15 Reserved - 0
F6-10 Elevator function selection 2
Door open/close The system still outputs the door open/close command
Bit0 0
holding at open limit upon door open/close limit.
Cancelling door
open/close The door open/close command is cancelled at a delay
Bit1 command at a delay after door open/close limit. 1
after door open/ The delay time is set in F8-22.
close limit
Cancelling door
open/close
The system immediately cancels the door open/close
Bit2 command cancelled 0
command after receiving the door open/close limit.
immediately at door
open/close limit
On normal conditions, the system determines that the
Not judging door door is completely closed only when the door close limit
Bit3 lock state at door signal is active and the door lock is applied. 0
close output If this function is enabled, the system need not judge
the door lock state.
If the feedback of the RUN and brake contactors is
abnormal, faults Err36 and Err37 are reported, and you
Auto reset for RUN need to manually reset the system.
Bit4 and brake contactor 1
stuck With this function, the system resets automatically after
the fault symptom disappears. A maximum of three auto
reset times are supported.

- 157 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Bit Function Description Default

If the door still does not close within the time set in Fb-
11 in automatic state, the system outputs the forced
door close signal; at this moment, the light curtain
Bit5 Forced door close becomes invalid and the buzzer tweets. 0
When the door lock is disconnected, this function is
invalid.
This function is used in applications where door open
and close are carried out manually.
Bit6 Manual door After this function is enabled, normal door open/close 0
detection is invalid, and the system re-defines the door
lock judgment method to control door open/close.
Generally, when Err53 is reported, if the conditions of
door open limit valid and door lock release are satisfied,
Cancelling door lock the controller resets Err53 automatically. A maximum of
Bit7 three times of auto reset is allowed. 0
auto-reset
If this function is enabled, the controller does not reset
Err53 automatically.
Bit8 = 0: NC output contactor (recommended)
NO/NC output The shorting PMSM stator contactor closes during
selection of shorting running and opens at stop.
Bit8 0
PMSM stator Bit8 = 1: NO output contactor
contactor
The shorting PMSM stator contactor opens during
running and closes at stop.
Door lock circuit
This function is enabled when the door pre-open module
Bit9 contactor output 0
is used.
monitoring
Cancelling
If this function is enabled, the controller does not detect
Bit10 overspeed 0
the overspeed fault (Err56).
protection
Car call executed The system responds to hall calls only after executing
Bit11 0
first all car calls.
Car call assisted
The auxiliary command terminal (CN8) on the CTB can
command in single
Bit12 be set for input of the disability calls (folding command 0
door used as
not required).
disability function
Folding command It is valid only when the function of Bit14 is enabled.
used as disability
Bit13 Bit13 = 1: Disability 0
function and back
door function Bit13 = 0: Back door
Function disabled: CN7 is used for front door calls or
ordinary calls, and CN8 is used for back door calls or
Car call command disability calls.
Bit14 0
folding Function enabled: For CN7 and CN8, inputs 1 to 16 are
used for front door calls or ordinary calls, and inputs 17
to 32 are used for back door calls or disability calls.

- 158 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Bit Function Description Default

This function can be enabled when both higher voltage
and low voltage detections are performed on the door
Higher/Low voltage
Bit15 lock circuit or safety circuit. When the time interval 0
1.5s time detection
between higher voltage and low voltage detection
exceeds 1.5s, the controller reports the door lock fault.

F6-11 Elevator function selection 3

Fire emergency There is hall call display after the elevator enters the fire
Bit0 0
display emergency state and returns to the fire emergency floor.
Firefighter operation There is hall call display when the elevator is in
Bit1 0
display firefighter operation state.
Direction display at The adjustment direction is displayed during micro-
Bit2 0
micro-leveling leveling adjustment.
Determined direction
The determined direction is displayed at stop in
Bit3 display in attendant 0
attendant state, even if there is no call.
state
No direction display
Bit4 There is no direction display at automatic stop. 0
at automatic stop
Elevator lock at door In the elevator lock state, the elevator keeps the door
Bit5 0
open open at the elevator lock floor.
Display available at In the elevator lock state, hall calls are displayed
Bit6 0
elevator lock normally.
Elevator lock at any The system enters the elevator lock state or returns to
Bit7 0
floor hall call the fire emergency floor at a hall call from any floor.
Clear floor number The displayed floor number is cleared before the
Bit8 0
in advance elevator reaches the destination floor.
Clear floor number in The displayed floor number is cleared before the
Bit9 advance in attendant elevator reaches the destination floor in attendant
state running state.
Displaying next The next floor to be arrived at is displayed during
Bit10 0
arriving floor number elevator running.
The car display blinks when the elevator arrives at a
Bit11 Blinking at arrival 0
floor. The blinking advance time is set in F6-12.
Door re-open during The door re-opens if the door open delay input is active
Bit12 0
door open delay during door close.
Door re-open after
The door re-opens if the car call of the present floor is
Bit13 car call of the 0
valid during door close.
present floor
Door re-open at door The door re-opens if the door open signal is active at
Bit14 0
close limit door close limit.
Bit15 Reserved - 0

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-12 Blinking advance time 0.0–15.0 2.0 s ☆

- 159 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

It is used to set the blinking advance time when the elevator arrives the floor required by the
car call.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-13 Parking floor 2 start time 00.00–23.59 0 - ★
F6-14 Parking floor 2 end time 00.00–23.59 0 - ★
F6-15 Parking floor 2 0 to F6-00 0 - ★

The elevator returns to the floor set in F6-15 if idle during the time period set in F6-13 to F6-
14.
Parking floor 2 can also be enabled by using the parking floor switchover switch.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-16 Fire emergency floor 2 0 to F6-00 0 - ★

Fire emergency floor 2 set in this parameter is enabled by using the fire emergency floor
switchover switch.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fire emergency function
F6-17 0–65535 1283 - ★
selection 1
Fire emergency function
F6-18 0–65535 1291 - ★
selection 2
Fire emergency function
F6-19 0–65535 17156 - ★
selection 3

These parameters are used to select the required fire emergency functions. Each bit of the
function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.

Bit Function Description Default

F6-17 Fire emergency function selection 1
Fire emergency 1
Bit0 1
door 1 valid In fire emergency state, the elevator under opposite door
Fire emergency 1 control opens the corresponding door.
Bit1 1
door 2 valid
Nearest floor for The elevator arrives at the nearest landing floor and uses
Bit2 0
fire emergency it as the fire emergency floor.
Opposite
Opposite door control in fire emergency state is the same
Bit3 door control 0
as that during normal running
unchanged

- 160 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Bit Function Description Default

Bit4 Reserved - 0
In fire emergency state, the controller records the system
Retentive at
Bit5 and current car states at power failure and restores these 0
power failure
state after power-on again.
Bit6 to
Reserved - 0
Bit7
Fire emergency
indicator blinking
Bit8 1
at fire emergency These functions control the fire emergency indicator and
1 tone in fire emergency state.
Fire emergency The following conditions are required to implement the
indicator steady functions:
Bit9 0
ON at fire Install the HCB-B.
emergency 1 Set the functions of the HCB-B output terminals in group
Fire emergency FL parameters.
tone Connect the fire emergency components to the
Bit10 discontinuous corresponding output terminals. 1
prompt at fire
emergency 1
F6-18 Fire emergency function selection 2
Fire emergency 2
Bit0 1
door 1 valid In firefighter operation state, the elevator under opposite
Fire emergency door control opens the corresponding door.
Bit1 1
2door 2 valid
Entering
Upon door open limit after the elevator returns to the fire
firefighter
Bit2 emergency floor, the elevator automatically enters the 0
operation state
firefighter operation state.
automatically
Upon door open limit after the elevator returns to the
fire emergency floor, the elevator enters the firefighter
Bit3 Firefighter switch 1
operation state only after the firefighter switch input inside
the car is active.
After the fire emergency switch is active, the elevator
returns to the fire emergency floor and opens the door.
Fire emergency
Bit4 Then, the fire emergency switch becomes inactive and 0
switch switchover
active again (within 500 ms), the elevator enters the
firefighter operation state.
Bit5 to
Reserved - 0
Bit6
Low speed door It is used to implement low speed door close in fire
Bit7 0
close emergency state.

- 161 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Bit Function Description Default

Fire emergency
indicator blinking These functions control the fire emergency indicator and
Bit8 1
at fire emergency tone in firefighter state.
2
The following conditions are required to implement the
Fire emergency functions:
indicator steady
Bit9 Install the HCB-B. 0
ON at fire
emergency 2 Set the functions of the HCB-B output terminals in group
FL parameters.
Fire emergency
tone prompt at Connect the fire emergency components to the
Bit10 corresponding output terminals. 1
intervals at fire
emergency 2
Exiting firefighter
If this signal is active, the elevator can exit the firefighter
Bit11 operation state at 0
operation state at any floor.
any floor
F6-19 Fire emergency function selection 3
The elevator responds to the call from the floor nearest
to the current floor first. In addition, the call in the same
Nearest call direction takes precedence over the call with the same
Bit0 distance. 0
mode
Multiple calls can be registered.
This mode has the highest priority.
The elevator responds to the call firstly registered in fire
emergency state. This call can be cancelled by pressing
Bit1 First call mode the button twice. 0
This mode has the medium priority.
Only one car call can be registered in firefighter operation
Bit2 Last call mode state. The later one overwrites the previous one. 1
This mode has the lowest priority.
Bit3 to
Reserved - 0
Bit4
Call registered
The car call is registered only when you holding down the
Bit5 by holding down 0
button and release it after door close limit.
button
In the fire emergency state, the door close process can
Closing door by
be completed only by holding down the door close button
Bit6 holding down the 0
until the door close limit is reached. Otherwise, it will be
door close button
switched over to door open automatically.
Bit7 Reserved - 0
Door close at car In the fire emergency state, the elevator automatically
Bit8 1
call active closes the door when there is a car call.
Bit9 Reserved - 0
Bit10 Reserved - 0
Automatic door In firefighter operation state, the elevator automatically
Bit11 0
open at arrival opens the door at arrival.

- 162 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Bit Function Description Default

Bit12 Reserved - 0
Bit13 Reserved - 0
In the fire emergency state, the door open process can
Opening door by
be completed only by holding down the door open button
Bit14 holding down the 1
until the door open limit is reached. Otherwise, it will be
door open button
switched over to door close automatically.
Automatic door
open after arrival The elevator automatically opens the door after arrival at
Bit15 0
at fire emergency the fire emergency floor.
floor

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-22 Elevator lock start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
F6-23 Elevator lock end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆

Within the time period set in these parameters, the elevator automatically runs to the
elevator lock floor and enters the elevator lock state.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-24 Attendant function selection 0–65535 0 - ★

It is used to select the attendant-related elevator functions. Each bit of the function code
defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.

Bit Function Description Default

All car calls and hall calls are cancelled after the
Calls cancelled after
Bit0 system enters the attendant state for the first 0
entering attendant state
time.
Not responding to hall The car blinks inside, prompting there is a hall
Bit1 0
calls call, but the system does not respond.
Attendant/Automatic state If this function is enabled, the setting of F5-00 is
Bit2 0
switchover valid.
The elevator door closes after the attendant
Bit3 Door close at jogging 0
presses the door close button manually.
It is the same as the normal state. After the door
Bit4 Automatic door close open holding time is reached, the door closes 0
automatically.
Buzzer tweeting at
When the hall call floor and the car call floor are
Bit5 intervals in attendant 0
different, the buzzer tweets 2.5s at intervals.
state

- 163 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Attendant/Automatic
F6-25 0–200 0 s ★
switchover time

It is used to set the switchover time from the attendant state to the automatic state. When
the value of this parameter is smaller than 5, this function is disabled,
If there is a hall call at current floor in attendant state, the system automatically switches
over to the automatic (normal) state after the time set in this parameter. After this running is
completed, the system automatically restores to the attendant state (F6-24 Bit2 must be set
to 1).

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-26 Emergency evacuation time limit 30–600 45 s ★

It sets the allowed emergency evacuation time.

If the time exceeds this value, the controller reports Err31.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Emergency evacuation
F6-27 0–65535 3 - ★
function selection

It is used to select the emergency evacuation-related functions. Each bit of the function code
defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.

Bit Function Description Default

Bit0 Door 1 valid In emergency evacuation state, the elevator under 1
Bit1 Door 2 valid opposite door control opens the corresponding door. 1
When the emergency evacuation time exceeds F6-26, the
Emergency
controller reports fault Err31, and switchover from shorting
Bit2 evacuation time 0
stator braking mode to controller drive based on time limit
protection
cannot be performed.
The system automatically switches over to EPS and enters
the inspection state. You need to press the inspection up
Bit3 Manual control 0
and down buttons at the same time to perform emergency
evacuation running.
The buzzer tweets at intervals in the emergency
Bit4 Buzzer tweeting 0
evacuation state.
The HCB-B needs to installed additionally.
Bit5 HCB output Set the terminal with the emergency evacuation function, 0
and the terminal will output the corresponding signal in the
emergency evacuation state.

- 164 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Bit Function Description Default

Shorting stator
braking mode It enables the function of switching over shorting stator
Bit6 0
switched over to braking mode to controller drive.
controller drive

Mode of shorting If the time of the shorting stator braking mode exceeds
0
stator braking 30s, the controller starts to drive the elevator.
Bit7 mode switched If the speed is still smaller than 0.005 m/s after 3s in 0
over to controller 1 the shorting stator braking mode, the controller starts
drive to drive the elevator.
The system exits emergency evacuation when
0 receiving the door open limit signal from the elevator
Emergency that arrives at the destination floor.
Bit8 evacuation exit 0
mode The system exits emergency evacuation when
1 receiving the door close limit signal from the elevator
that arrives at the destination floor.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-28 Inspection function selection 0–65535 33 - ★

It is used to select the inspection-related functions. Each bit of the function code defines a
function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.

Bit Function Description Default

If the fire emergency signal is active in inspection
Fire emergency prompt
Bit0 state, the controller outputs the arrival gong at 1
in inspection state
intervals, giving a prompt to the inspection operator.
Door lock disconnected The door lock is additionally disconnected once
Bit1 after inspection switched when the inspection state is switched over to the 0
over to normal running normal running state.
Bit2 to
Reserved - 0
Bit4
Door open and close
The elevator door opens and closes once after the
once after inspection
Bit5 system turns from inspection to normal running or 1
turned to normal or first-
during first-time power-on.
time power-on

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-30 VIP function selection 0–65535 0 - ★

It is used to select the elevator VIP function. Each bit of the function code defines a function,
as described in the following table.

- 165 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.

Bit Function Description Default

If this function is enabled, the system enters VIP running
Bit0 VIP1 function when the VIP input is active and F6-31 is a non-zero 1
value.
If this function is enabled (function in Bit7 is disabled),
Bit1 VIP2 function the system enters VIP running when the security input is 0
active and F6-32 is a non-zero value.
When there is a hall call at the VIP floor, the system
VIP enabled by hall enters VIP running.
Bit2 0
call (at VIP floor) If there are hall calls at both VIP floor 1 and VIP floor 2,
the system responds to the hall call at VIP floor 2 first.
If you hold down the door open button for 3s upon door
VIP enabled by
Bit3 open limit after the elevator arrives at the VIP floor, the 0
button at VIP floor
system enters VIP running.
VIP enabled by After the terminal for VIP hall call becomes ON, the
Bit4 0
terminal system enters VIP running.
If you hold down the door open button for 3s upon door
VIP enabled by
Bit5 open limit after the elevator arrives at any floor, the 0
button at any floor
system enters VIP running.
VIP enabled by car When there is a car call at the VIP floor, the system
Bit6 0
call enters VIP running and does not respond to hall calls.
If this function is enabled, VIP floor 2 set in F6-32 is used
Security floor auto as the security floor during 22:00 to 6:00. The elevator
Bit7 0
enable runs to the security floor first every time, stops and opens
the door, and then runs to the destination floor.
Number of VIP car If this function is enabled, only one car call can be
Bit8 0
calls limited selected simultaneously in the VIP state.
If this function is enabled, the system exits VIP running
Bit9 VIP auto exit 0
after the VIP auto exit time set in F6-33 is reached.
Bit10
to Reserved - 0
Bit13
During VIP running, the system saves the hall call but
Bit13 Hall call saved 0
does not respond to it.
If this function is enabled, the elevator automatically
closes the door after the door open holding time is
Bit14 Auto door close reached. 1
If this function is disabled, door close is implemented by
pressing the door close button.
Bit15 Reserved - 0

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-31 VIP floor 1 0 to F6-00 0 - ★

- 166 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-32 VIP floor 2 0 to F6-00 0 - ★

They are used to set the VIP floors.

These parameters are valid only when F6-30 Bit0 and Bit = 1.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F6-33 VIP auto exit time 0–200 0 s ★

When F6-30 Bit9 = 1, the system exits VIP running after the time set in this parameter is
reached.

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Start time of time-based floor
F6-35 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
service 1
End time of time-based floor
F6-36 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
service 1
Service floors 1 of time-based
F6-37 0–65535 65535 - ☆
floor service 1
Service floors 2 of time-based
F6-38 0–65535 65535 - ☆
floor service 1
Service floors 3 of time-based
F6-39 0–65535 65535 - ☆
floor service 1
Service floors 4 of time-based
F6-40 0–65535 65535 - ☆
floor service 1
Start time of time-based floor
F6-41 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
service 2
End time of time-based floor
F6-42 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
service 2
Service floors 1 of time-based
F6-43 0–65535 65535 - ☆
floor service 2
Service floors 2 of time-based
F6-44 0–65535 65535 - ☆
floor service 2
Service floors 3 of time-based
F6-45 0–65535 65535 - ☆
floor service 2
Service floor 4 of time-based
F6-46 0–65535 65535 - ☆
floor service 2
Start time of time-based floor
F6-47 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
service 3
End time of time-based floor
F6-48 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
service 3
Service floors 1 of time-based
F6-49 0–65535 65535 - ☆
floor service 3

- 167 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Service floors 2 of time-based
F6-50 0–65535 65535 - ☆
floor service 3
Service floors 3 of time-based
F6-51 0–65535 65535 - ☆
floor service 3
Service floors 4 of time-based
F6-52 0–65535 65535 - ☆
floor service 3

These parameters define the time periods of three groups of time-based services and
corresponding service floors.
•• Service floors 1: floors 1–16
•• Service floors 2: floors 17–32
•• Service floors 3: floors 33–48
•• Service floors 4: floors 49–56
In the time period of time-based service, the elevator responds to the service floors set by
the related time-based service parameters, but ignores the service floors set by F6-05, F6-
06, F6-07, and F6-09.
The setting of time-based service floors is the same as that of service floors in F6-05.

Note

During the time-based floor service period, the settings of F6-05, F6-06 and F5-35 are invalid.
If the time periods of the three time-based services are overlapped, the system implements the
service according to the priority: Service 1 > Service 2 > Service 3.

Group F7: Intelligent Commissioning Parameters

This group of parameters is specialized for elevator commissioning.
All the settings are not saved and restore to the default setting after power-off.
Follow the instructions for normal-speed commissioning:
1. Before the commissioning, ensure that the shaft is unobstructed and the related
parameters have been set properly.
2. Run the elevator to the middle floor of the shaft at the inspection speed so as to prevent
wrong running direction.
3. Perform single-floor command commissioning and then perform multi-floor command
commissioning.
4. After the commissioning is complete, check that the parameters in this group are set
properly.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F7-00 Car call floor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆

- 168 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F7-01 Up call floor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
F7-02 Down call floor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆

These parameters are used to set the destination floors at elevator commissioning or
repairing. They can be respectively used as the car call button, hall call up button and hall
call down button. They remain valid after the commissioning command is input, and become
invalid until they are set to 0 or the system suffers power failure.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F7-03 Random running times 0–60000 0 - ☆

It is used to set the random running times of the system.

The NICE7000 has the random automatic running function. If the setting of F7-03 is greater
than 60000, the system keeps implementing random automatic running until you set F7-03
to 0.
You can set the time interval between two times of random running in F7-08.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

0: Yes
F7-04 Hall call enabled 0 - ☆
1: No

It is used to enable the hall call function.

0: Yes (hall call allowed)
1: No (hall call forbidden)

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

0: Yes
F7-05 Door open enabled 0 - ☆
1: No

It is used to enable the door open function.

0: Yes (door open allowed)
1: No (door open forbidden)

Note

Continuous running of the elevator without door open accelerates overheating of the controller
module. Long-time use in such mode may cause overheat protection, and therefore, use the
function with caution.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

0: Disabled
F7-06 Overload function 0 - ☆
1: Enabled

- 169 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

It is used to enable the overload function.

Note

This function is used only in the heavy-load test. Once the test is complete, prohibit overload
running immediately.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

0: Enabled
F7-07 Limit switch 0 - ☆
1: Disabled

It is used to enable the limit switch function.

Note

The limit switch is disabled only in the test of the final limit switch. Use the function with caution.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F7-08 Time interval of random running 0–1000 0 s ☆

It is used to set the time interval between two times of random running.

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
F7-09 Accumulative energy consumption 0–65535 0 kW ●

F7-10 Accumulative feedback energy 0–65535 0 kW ●

These parameters record the energy consumed during elevator running and the feedback
energy from the energy feedback unit.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Commissioning 0: No operation
F7-26 0 - ★
function selection 1: Shaft auto-tuning

It is used to set whether to perform shaft auto-tuning.

Group F8: Auxiliary Logic Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F8-00 Load for load cell auto-tuning 0–100 0 % ★

It is used to set the load for load cell auto-tuning.

To perform load cell auto-tuning, do as follows:
1. Ensure that F2-11 is set to 0 and F5-36 is set to 2 or 3 to make the system allow load
cell auto tuning.

- 170 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

2. Stop the elevator at any floor, with the car in the no-load state. Set F8-00 to 0 and press
ENTER .

3. Put N% load in the car. Then set F8-00 to N and press ENTER .

For example, if you put 500 kg load in the elevator with rated load of 1000 kg, set F8-00
to 50.
After the load-cell auto-tuning is completed, the corresponding no-load and full-load data
will be recorded in F8-06 and F8-07. You can also manually input the data according to the
actual situation.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

0: Invalid
F8-01 Pre-torque selection 0 - ★
1: Valid

It is used to set the pre-torque compensation mode at startup of the elevator.

When pre-torque compensation is used together with the load cell, the system outputs the
torque matching the load in advance to ensure the riding comfort at startup.
The output torque is limited by F2-08 (Torque upper limit). When the load torque is greater
than the set torque upper limit, the output torque of the system is the torque upper limit.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0–100.0 50.0 % ★

It is used to set the pre-torque offset. It is actually the balance coefficient of the elevator,
indicating the percentage of the car load to the rated load when the counterweight and the
car weight are balanced.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★

These two parameters are used to set the pre-torque gain when the elevator runs on the
drive side or the brake side.
•• Motor driving state: full-load up, no-load down
•• Motor braking state: full-load down, no-load up
F8-03 (Drive gain) or F8-04 (Brake gain) scales the elevator’s present pre-torque coefficient
when the motor runs at the drive or brake side.
If the gain set is higher, then the calculated value of startup pre-torque compensation is
higher. The controller identifies the braking or driving state according to the load cell signal
and automatically calculates the required torque compensation value.
When an analog device is used to measure the load, these parameters are used to adjust
the riding comfort at elevator startup. The method of adjusting the startup is as follows:

- 171 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

•• In the driving state, increasing the value of F8-03 could reduce the rollback during the
elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start.
•• In the braking state, increasing the value of F8-04 could reduce the jerk in command
direction during the elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F8-05 Car load 0–255 0 - ●

This parameter is readable and reflects the load situation in the car. The value is sampled
by the NICE7000 by using a load cell.
If F5-00 < 2, F8-05 = 0.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F8-06 No-load load threshold 0–255 0 - ★
F8-07 Full-load load threshold 0–255 100 - ★

These two parameters respectively specify the car no-load and full-load thresholds.
Generally, the system automatically determines the values after load-cell auto-tuning. Adjust
them properly according to requirements.
Example:
If the load cell data is 25 and 175 respectively at no-load and full-load, the system
determines that the normal load range is 25–175.
Set F8-18, F8-19, and F8-20 respectively to 30%, 80%, and 110%.
When F8-05 is 70 [30% x (175-25) + 25 = 70), 145, and 190, the system determines that the
elevator is in light-load, full-load, and overload state.

Note

If F8-06 = F8-07, the full-load and overload functions become invalid.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F8-08 Anti-nuisance function 0, 1, 2, 4 0 - ☆

It is the criteria for judging whether nuisance exists.

The values are as follows:
•• 0: Anti-nuisance function disabled
•• 1: Nuisance judged by load cell
A load cell is required. The system judges whether nuisance exists by comparing the
load cell data and the number of car calls.
•• 2: Nuisance judged by light curtain
The system determines that nuisance exists when the light curtain does not act after the
elevator stops at arrival for three consecutive times.

- 172 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

•• 4: Nuisance judged by light-load signal

If the light-load signal is active, the system determines that nuisance exists when the
number of car calls is greater than a certain value.
When the system determines that the elevator is in the nuisance state, it cancels all car
calls. In this case, call calls need to be registered again.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F8-09 Rated elevator load 300–9999 1000 kg ★

It is used to set the rated elevator load. This parameter is used for the anti-nuisance
function.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F8-10 Logic program control 0–65535 0 - ★

It is used to select the elevator functions. Each bit of the function code defines a function, as
described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.

Bit Function Description Default

If this function is enabled, the operation panel does not
display the following uncommon parameters:
F1-12 to F1-24
F4-08 to F4-119
Hiding F7-08 to F7-10
Bit13 uncommon 0
F9-12 to F9-14
parameters
FA-12 to FA-14
Fb-01
FH-21 to FH-29
Fr-01 to Fr-28

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

0–127
F8-14 Local address 1 - ★
0: broadcast address

It is used to set the communication address of the elevator.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F8-18 Overload percentage 100–130 110 % ★
F8-19 Full-load percentage 70–110 80 % ★
F8-20 Light-load percentage 10–50 30 % ★

- 173 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

These parameters set the percentages for judging overload, full-load, and light-load.
For details, see the descriptions of F8-06 and F8-07.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F8-21 Arrival gong advance time 0–10.0 1.0 s ★

It is used to set the advance time of the arrival gong prompt.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F8-22 Delay upon door open limit 0–2000 1000 ms ★

It is used to set the door open holding time upon door open limit.
It is used together with F6-10 Bit2.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F8-24 Command 2 start address 0–56 0 - ★

It is used to set the start address of the door 2 HCBs when Mod1 is used as the door 2
communication interface.
For details, see section 5.5.3.

Group F9: Time Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Idle time before returning to
F9-00 0–240 10 min ★
base floor

It is used to set the idle time of the elevator before returning to the base floor.
When the idle time of the elevator exceeds the setting of this parameter, the elevator returns
to the base floor.
If this parameter is set to 0, it becomes invalid.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Time for fan and lamp to be
F9-01 0–240 2 min ★
turned off
It is used to set the time that fan and lamp stays ON before being turned off automatically.
If there is no running command in the automatic running state, the system turns off the fan
and lamp automatically after the time set in this parameter.
If this parameter is set to 0, it becomes invalid.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F9-02 Motor running time limit 0–45 45 s ★

It is used to set the running time limit of the motor.

- 174 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

In normal running state, if the continuous motor running time in the same direction between
two adjacent floors exceeds the setting of this parameter but no leveling signal is received,
the system will perform protection.
This parameter is mainly used for over-time protection in the case of steel rope slipping on
the traction sheave.
If this parameter is set to a value smaller than 3s, it becomes invalid.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F9-03 Accumulative working hours 0–65535 0 h ●
F9-04 Accumulative running hours 0–65535 0 h ●
F9-05 Accumulative working days 0–65535 0 day ●

These parameters record the accumulative running and working time.

The working time counts the time since use, regardless of running or stop.
The running time counts only the elevator running time.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F9-06 High byte of running times 0–9999 0 - ●
F9-07 Low byte or running times 0–9999 0 - ●

Running times of the elevator = F9-06 x 10000 + F9-07.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

F9-12 Clock: year 2000–2100 2010 YYYY ☆
F9-13 Clock: month and day 1.01–12.31 301 MM.DD ☆
F9-14 Clock: hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ☆

These parameters are used to set the current date and time of the system.

Group FA: Auxiliary Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FA-00 Group FA security password 0–65535 01000 - ●

You are allowed to view and modify group FA parameters only after entering the security
password.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FA-01 Display in running state 1–65535 65535 - ☆

It is used to set the running parameters displayed on the operation panel when the elevator
is in the running state.
FA-01 includes 16 binary bits, each defining a parameter. A total of 16 parameters can be
can be displayed during running.

- 175 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

The 16 binary bits correspond to the running parameters listed in the following table.

Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default

Bit0 Speed reference 1 Bit8 Output frequency 1
Bit1 Logic information 1 Bit9 Output torque 1
Bit2 Curve information 1 Bit10 Torque current 1
Bit3 Pre-torque current 1 Bit11 Output power 1
Bit4 Feedback speed 1 Bit12 Present position 1
Bit5 Bus voltage 1 Bit13 Communication interference 1
Bit6 Output voltage 1 Bit14 Encoder interference 1
Bit7 Output current 1 Bit15 Car load 1

The method of setting FA-01 is as follows:

If a bit is set to 1, the parameter indicated by this bit is displayed; if this bit is set to 0, the
parameter is not displayed.
Convert the sum of binary values of all 16 bits to decimal, and then set the decimal on the
operation panel.
Figure 7-5 Converting binary value of FA-01 to decimal
FA-01 Bit Addressing Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Display in running state Binary Addressing 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 256 612 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

Bit0
1
Bit1
2
Bit2
4
Bit3
8
Bit4
16
Bit5
32
Bit6
64
Bit7
128
Bit8
256
Bit9
512
Bit10
1024
Bit11
2048
Bit12
4096
Bit13
8192
Bit14
16384
Bit15
32768

Convert binary value to

decimal, and set this decimal
on the operation panel

By default, all 16 parameters are displayed; therefore, the value set on the operation panel
is:
1 + 2 + 4 + ...32768 = 65535
The method of viewing FA-01 is as follows:

In the running state, the display of FA-01 is a decimal value. You can press to view the

- 176 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

parameter indicated by each bit circularly.

Figure 7-6 Shift between parameters displayed in the running state

Shift between parameters

displayed in the running state

Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9 Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit14 Bit15

Present position
Feedback speed
Speed reference
Logic information

Curve information

Pre-torque current

Bus voltage

Output voltage

Output current

Output frequency

Output torque

Torque current

Output power

Communication
interference
Encoder interference

Car load
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-02 Display in stop state 1–65535 4095 - ☆

It is used to set the running parameters displayed on the operation panel when the elevator
is in the stop state.
FA-02 includes 16 binary bits, each defining a parameters. A total of 16 parameters can be
can be displayed at stop.
The 16 binary bits correspond to the parameters listed in the following table.

Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default

Bit0 Rated elevator speed 1 Bit8 Encoder signal 3 1
Bit1 Bus voltage 1 Bit9 Encoder signal 4 1
Bit2 Current floor 1 Bit10 Encoder signal 5 1
Bit3 Current position 1 Bit11 Encoder signal 6 1
Bit4 Car load 1 Bit12 Reserved 0
Bit5 Slow-down distance 1 Bit13 Reserved 0
Bit6 Encoder signal 1 1 Bit14 Reserved 0
Bit7 Encoder signal 2 1 Bit15 Reserved 0

The method of setting and viewing FA-02 is similar to that of FA-01.

- 177 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Figure 7-7 Shift between parameters displayed in the stop state

Shift between parameters

displayed in the stop state

Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9 Bit10 Bit11

Encoder signal 3
Car load

Encoder signal 2
Rated elevator speed

Bus voltage

Current floor

Current position

Encoder signal 1

Encoder signal 4

Encoder signal 5

Encoder signal 6
Slow-down distance
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-03 Product SN 1–7000 5000 - ●

It displays the product SN.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FA-04 Software version 1 (CTB) 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-05 Software version 2 (MCB) 0–65535 0 - ●
Software version 3 (drive
FA-06 0–65535 0 - ●
board software)

These two parameters respectively display the program version number of the CTB, logic
control board and the drive control board.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FA-07 Heatsink temperature 0–100 0 °C ●

It displays the current temperature of the heatsink.

Normally, the heatsink temperature is below 40°C. When the heatsink temperature is too
high, the system lowers the carrier frequency automatically to reduce heating. When the
heatsink temperature rises to a certain value, the system reports the module overheat fault
and stops running.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FA-09 Protection function selection 0–65535 3 - ★

It is used to select the controller protection functions.

Each bit of the function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.

- 178 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Bit Function Description

When the motor load or controller load exceeds a certain threshold,
Overload
Bit0 the system performs protection and reports the motor overload or
protection
controller overload fault.
Output phase After detecting phase loss on the output side, the system performs
Bit1
loss protection protection and reports the fault.
Input phase loss After detecting phase loss on the input side, the system performs
Bit3
protection protection and reports the fault.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FA-10 Overload protection coefficient 0.50–10.00 1.00 - ★

After detecting that the output current exceeds (FC-10 x Rated motor current) and the
duration lasts the time specified in the inverse time lag curve, the system outputs fault Err11
indicating motor overload.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FA-11 Overload pre-warning coefficient 50–100 80 % ★

After detecting that the output current exceeds (FA-11 x Rated motor current) and the
duration lasts the time specified in the inverse time lag curve, the system outputs a pre-
warning signal.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FA-15 Program control selection 0–65535 0 - ★

It is used to select the elevator functions.

Each bit of the function code defines a function, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the function indicated by this bit is enabled; if this bit is set to 0, the
function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.

Bit Function Description Default

The controller cannot perform shaft auto-tuning if the floor
Super short floor
Bit0 height is less than 500 mm. After this function is enabled, shaft 0
function
auto-tuning can be performed normally.
If this function is enabled, the up slow-down 1 signal does not
Up slow-down
reset floor display. The down slow-down 1 signal still resets
Bit1 not reset for 0
floor display. This is valid only when the super short floor
super short floor
function is enabled.
If this function is enabled, the down slow-down 1 signal does
Down slow-down
not reset floor display. The up slow-down 1 signal still resets
Bit2 not reset for 0
floor display. This is valid only when the super short floor
super short floor
function is enabled.

- 179 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Bit Function Description Default

During normal running, the system keeps comparing the
Cancelling position at action of the leveling/slow-down signal with the
monitoring at position obtained through shaft auto-tuning. If the deviations is
Bit3 too large, the system reports the related fault. 0
leveling and
slow-down If this function is enabled, the system will not detect the
deviation or report the fault.
Slow-down stuck After detecting that the slow-down signal is stuck, the system
Bit4 0
detection reports fault Err45.
Canceling 45s
The shaft auto-tuning time is not restricted by the motor 45s
Bit5 time limit at shaft 0
running time limit.
auto-tuning
Leveling If this function is enabled, adjustment in group Fr parameters
Bit6 0
adjustment is valid.

Group Fb: Door Function Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-00 Number of door machine(s) 1–2 1 - ★

It is used to set the number of door machine(s).

Set this parameter based on actual conditions.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-01 Door function selection 0–65535 0 - ●

It selects the door control and display functions. Each bit of the function code defines a
function, as described in the following table.

Bit Function Setting Bit Function Setting

Independent for Independent for
1 front door and back Car call 1 front door and back
Hall call door door
Bit0 Bit1 button
button display
Consistent for front display Consistent for front
0 0
door and back door door and back door
Corresponding door Corresponding door
Hall call door 1 Car call door 1
Bit2 open Bit3 open
open mode open mode
0 Both doors open 0 Both doors open
Independent for Independent for
1 front door and back Door close 1 front door and back
Door open door door
Bit8 Bit9 button
button display
Consistent for front display Consistent for front
0 0
door and back door door and back door

- 180 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Bit Function Setting Bit Function Setting

Corresponding door Corresponding door
Door open by 1 Door close 1
Bit10 open Bit11 open
button by button
0 Both doors open 0 Both doors open
Front/ Only one door open
1 Valid 1
Back door Door mutual on any condition
Bit6 Bit13
switchover by exclusive
switch 0 Invalid 0 Both doors open

Independent for
1 front door and back
Light curtain door
Bit14
judgment
Consistent for front
0
door and back door

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-02 Service floors 1 of door machine 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆
Fb-03 Service floors 2 of door machine 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆
Fb-04 Service floors 3 of door machine 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆
Fb-05 Service floors 4 of door machine 1 0–65535 65535 - ☆
Fb-06 Service floors 1 of door machine 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆
Fb-07 Service floors 2 of door machine 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆
Fb-08 Service floors 3 of door machine 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆
Fb-09 Service floors 4 of door machine 2 0–65535 65535 - ☆

These parameters are used to set the service floors of door machine 1 and door machine 2.
•• Service floors 1: floors 1–16
•• Service floors 2: floors 17–32
•• Service floors 3: floors 33–48
•• Service floors 4: floors 49–56
The setting method is the same as that for F6-05.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-10 Door open protection time 5–99 10 s ☆

It is used to set the door open protection time.

After outputting the door open command, if the system does not receive the door open limit
signal after the time set in this parameter, the system re-opens the door. When the door
open/close times reach the value set in Fb-13, the system reports fault Err48.

- 181 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-11 Forced door close time 5–99 15 s ☆

If the forced door close function is enabled, when there is no door close signal after the time
set in this parameter is reached, the system enters the forced door close state and sends a
forced door close signal.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-12 Door close protection time 5–99 15 s ☆

It is used to set the door close protection time.

After outputting the door close command, if the system does not receive the door close limit
signal after the time set in this parameter, the system re-closes the door. When the door
open/close times reach the value set in Fb-13, the system reports fault Err49.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-13 Door re-open times 0–20 0 - ☆

It is used to set the door re-open/re-close times allowed when door open/close is abnormal.

Note

If this parameter is set to 0, it indicates that door re-open is not supported; in this case, the
elevator keeps opening/closing the door if it does not receive the door open/close limit signal.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-14 Door state of standby elevator 0–2 0 - ☆

It is used to set the door state when the elevator is in stop and standby state.
The values are as follows:
•• 0: Closing the door as normal at base floor
•• 1: Waiting with door open at base floor
•• 2: Waiting with door open at each floor

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-15 Door open holding time for hall call 1–30 5 s ☆

It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a hall call. The elevator closes the
door immediately after receiving a door close command.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-16 Door open holding time for car call 1–30 3 s ☆

- 182 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a car call. The elevator closes the
door immediately after receiving a door close command.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-17 Door open holding time at base floor 1–30 10 s ☆

It is used to set the door open holding time after the elevator arrives at the base floor. The
elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-18 Door open delay 10–30000 30 s ☆

It is used to set the door open holding time when there is door open delay input. The
elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-19 Special door open holding time 10–1000 30 s ☆

It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a disability call.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Fb-20 Manual door open holding time 1–60 10 s ☆

It is used to set the door open limit delay in the case of manual door. This parameter is valid
when the manual door function is used.

Group FC: Brief Fault Information

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FC-00 Designated fault 0–99 0 - ☆

It is used to designate the fault to be monitored.

The designated fault code is saved in parameters of group E9, and will not be overwritten.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FC-01 20th fault code 0–6299 0 - ●
FC-02 20th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-03 20th fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
FC-04 20th fault hour and minute 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
FC-05 20th fault information 0–65535 0 - ●
···
FC-46 11th fault code 0–6299 0 - ●

- 183 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FC-47 11th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-48 11th fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
FC-49 11th fault hour and minute 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
FC-50 11th fault information 0–65535 0 - ●

These parameters record the first 10 faults of the elevator among the last 20 faults.
The fault code is a 4-digit number. The two high digits indicate the floor where the car is
located when the fault occurs, and the two low digits indicate the fault code. For example,
the FC-46 is 0835, indicating that when the 11th fault (Err35) occurs, the car is near floor 8.
The fault subcode is used to locate the causes of the fault. The specific fault time is
recorded in month, day, hour and minute.

Group Fd: Parallel/Group Control Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Number of elevators in
Fd-00 1–3 1 - ★
parallel/group mode
Fd-01 Elevator No. 1–3 1 - ★

These parameters are used to set the number of elevators and elevator No. in in parallel//
group mode.
The NICE7000 supports parallel control of two elevators or group control of up to eight
elevators.

- 184 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Group FE: Display Parameters

Function Parameter
Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code Name
FE-01 Floor 1 display 1901 - ★
FE-02 Floor 2 display 1902 - ★
FE-03 Floor 3 display 1903 - ★
FE-04 Floor 4 display 1904 - ★
00: Display "0" 22: Display "23"
FE-05 Floor 5 display 01: Display "1" 23: Display "C" 1905 - ★
FE-06 Floor 6 display 02: Display "2" 24: Display "D" 1906 - ★
FE-07 Floor 7 display 03: Display "3" 25: Display "E" 1907 - ★
FE-08 Floor 8 display 04: Display "4" 26: Display "F" 1908 - ★
FE-09 Floor 9 display 05: Display "5" 27: Display "I" 1909 - ★
06: Display "6" 28: Display "J"
FE-10 Floor 10 display 0100 - ★
07: Display "7" 29: Display "K"
FE-11 Floor 11 display 0101 - ★
08: Display "8" 30: Display "N"
FE-12 Floor 12 display 0102 - ★
09: Display "9" 31: Display "O"
FE-13 to Floor 13 to floor
10: Display "A" 32: Display "Q" 0103–0502 - ★
FE-52 52 display
11: Display "B" 33: Display "S"
FE-53 Floor 53 display 0503 - ★
12: Display "G" 34: Display "T"
FE-54 Floor 54 display 13: Display "H" 35: Display "U" 0504 - ★
FE-55 Floor 55 display 14: Display "L" 36: Display "V" 0505 - ★
FE-56 Floor 56 display 15: Display "M" 37: Display "W" 0506 - ★
16: Display "P" 38: Display "X"
Highest digit
FE-61 17: Display "R" 39: Display "Y" 0 - ★
display 1
Highest digit 18: Display "-" 40: Display "Z"
FE-62 19: No display 41: Display "15" 0 - ★
display 2
Highest digit 20: Display "12" 42: Display "17"
FE-63 0 - ★
display 3 21: Display "13" 43: Display "19"
Highest digit
FE-64 0 - ★
display 4
Highest digit
FE-65 0 - ★
display 5

These parameters are used to set the display of each floor.

The setting range of FE-01 to FE-56 is 0000–9999, where the two high digits indicate the
display code of the ten's digit, and the two low digits indicate the display code of the unit's
digit.
When the 2-digit display cannot meet the requirement, add the third-digit display by setting
FE-61 to FE-65. In the values of these parameters, the two high digits indicate the floor
address that requires special display, and the two low digits indicate the display content.
For example, if floor 18 needs to be displayed as "17A", set FE-18 to 0710 (display "7A"),

- 185 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

and then set the highest digit display, that is, FE-52 to 1801 (indicating that the highest digit
display of floor address 18 is "1").

Floor 18 display

1 7A
FE-18 (Floor 18 display)
FE-52 = 1801
= 0710

18 01 07 10

Floor address for Special display

Display "7" Display "A"
special display ("18") content ("1")

Group FF: Factory Parameters

The factory parameters are not described here.

Group FH: Close-Loop Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Group FH security
FH-00 0–65535 01000 - ●
password

You are allowed to view and modify group FH parameters only after entering the security
password.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

0: SIN/COS encoder, absolute
encoder
FH-01 Encoder type 0 - ★
1: UVW encoder
4: ABZ incremental encoder

It is used to set the encoder type matching the motor.

Set it to 0 when the ERN1387/1313/413 encoder is used for the synchronous motor.
Set it to 0 when a UVW incremental encoder is used.
Set it to 4 when the ABA applicable to the asynchronous motor is used.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FH-02 Encoder pulses per revolution 0–10000 2048 PPR ★

It is used to set the pulses per revolution of the encoder (according to the encoder
nameplate).
This parameter is critical to CLVC. Set the encoder nominal value in this parameter.
Otherwise, the elevator may not run properly.

- 186 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

When the feedback pulses received by the system is data after frequency division by other
equipment, set the frequency-division value rather than the encoder nominal value in this
parameter.
For example, if the encoder PPR is 8192 and is sent to the system after 1/4 frequency
division, set this parameter to 2048 (8192/4 = 2048).
F0-04 (Rated elevator speed), F1-05 (Rated motor rotational speed), and FH-02 (Encoder
pulses per revolution) determine whether the elevator can run properly. If any of these
parameters is changed, shaft auto-tuning must be performed again.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Encoder wire-breaking
FH-03 0–10.0 2.1 s ★
detection time

This parameter is used to set the time that a wire-break fault lasts before being detected.
After the elevator starts running at non-zero speed, if there is no encoder signal input within
the time set in this parameter, the system reports fault Err20 and stops running.
When the value is smaller than 1s, this function is disabled.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Encoder initial angle
FH-04 0.0–359.9 0 Degree (°) ★
(synchronous motor)
Encoder current angle
FH-05 0.0–359.9 0.0 Degree (°) ●
(synchronous motor)

These parameters respectively display the encoder initial angle and current actual angle.
They are valid only to synchronous motor.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FH-06 Wiring mode 0–15 0 - ★
It sets the motor wiring mode. It is automatically updated after motor auto-tuning.
If the value is a even number, the UVW phase sequence is correct.
If the value is an odd number, the UVW phase sequence is incorrect.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FH-08 Zero drift 1 0–65535 0 - ★
FH-09 Zero drift 2 0–65535 0 - ★
FH-10 Zero drift 3 0–65535 0 - ★
FH-11 Zero drift 4 0–65535 0 - ★

These parameters specify the zero drift of the .

The ABCD analog signals of the SIN/COS encoder may not be sine or symmetric along with
the 0 axis due to characteristics of different types of encoder or effect of the sampling circuit,

- 187 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

causing incorrect calculation of certain variables and reducing the control effect.
The system automatically performs zero drift detection on the SIN/COS encoder ABCD
analog signals.
If the encoder needs to be replaced after motor auto-tuning, manually clear the zero drift
values first.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FH-17 Position of up slow-down 1 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
FH-18 Position of down slow-down 1 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
FH-19 Position of up slow-down 2 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
FH-20 Position of down slow-down 2 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
FH-21 Position of up slow-down 3 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
FH-22 Position of down slow-down 3 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★

These parameters specify the positions of all slow-down switches relative to the top and
bottom leveling positions.
For the installation positions of the slow-down switches, see the description of section 3.10.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FH-29 Position switch signal delay 0–200 0 ms ★

It is used to set the delay from receiving the shaft position switch signal to responding.

Group FL: Extension Terminal Function Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FL-00 CTB input type 0–511 320 - ★

It is used to define the input signal type (NO/NC) of the CTB by binary bit. Each bit of the
function code defines a signal, as described in the following table.
If a bit is set to 1, the signal indicated by this bit is NO input; if this bit is set to 0, this signal
is NC input.
For example, the input signal types of the CTB of an elevator are set as follows:

Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default

Bit0 Door 1 light curtain 0 Bit5 Door 2 close limit 0
Bit1 Door 2 light curtain 0 Bit6 Full-load signal (digital) 1
Bit2 Door 1 open limit 0 Bit7 Overload signal (digital) 0
Bit3 Door 2 open limit 0 Bit8 Light-load signal (digital) 1
Bit4 Door 1 close limit 0 0: NC input; 1: NO input

Convert the binary value to decimal 320, and set it on the operation panel.

- 188 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Note that the latest CTB-D has nine input terminals, but the wiring is not affected when the
NICE7000 is connected to the CTB of the earlier version.

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code

FL-01 HCB-B:JP1 input 0: Invalid 0 - ★

1: Light-load signal
FL-02 HCB-B:JP2 input 2: Half-load signal 0 - ★
3: Door 2 selection
FL-03 HCB-B:JP3 input 4: Door 2 restricted 0 - ★
5: Door 1 safety edge
FL-04 HCB-B:JP4 input 0 - ★
6: Door 2 safety edge
FL-05 HCB-B:JP5 input 7: Single/Double door selection 0 - ★
8: Fire emergency floor switchover
FL-06 HCB-B:JP6 input 9: Fire emergency start signal 0 - ★

These parameters are used to set the functions of input terminals on the HCB-B board.

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
FL-07 HCB-B:A1 output 0 - ★
0: Invalid
FL-08 HCB-B:A2 output 0 - ★
1: Fault output
FL-09 HCB-B:B1 output 2: Non-door zone stop output 0 - ★
FL-10 HCB-B:B2 output 3: Non-service state output 0 - ★
FL-11 HCB-B:C1 output 4: Fire emergency output 0 - ★
FL-12 HCB-B:C2 output 5: Power failure emergency output 0 - ★
FL-13 HCB-B:C3 output 6: Door lock valid 0 - ★
FL-14 HCB-B:C4 output 7: Night output signal 0 - ★
8: Fire emergency indicator
FL-15 HCB-B:C5 output 0 - ★
9: Fire emergency tone
FL-16 HCB-B:C6 output 0 - ★

These parameters are used to set the functions of output terminals on the HCB-B board.

- 189 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Function Parameter
Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code Name
1: Elevator lock signal
2: Fire emergency signal
FL-17 HCB:JP1 input 3: Current floor forbidden 1 - ★
4: VIP floor signal
5: Security floor signal
6: Service floor switchover
7: Parking floor switchover
FL-18 HCB:JP2 input 8: Down collective selective switch 2 - ★
9: Peak service switch
10: Fire emergency floor switchover

These parameters are used to set the functions of input terminals on the HCB.

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
0: Invalid
FL-19 HCB:JP1 output 1: Up arrival indicator 1 - ★
2: Down arrival indicator
3: Fault output
4: Non-door zone stop output
FL-20 HCB:JP2 output 5: Non-service state output 2 - ★
6: Buzzer output

These parameters are used to set the functions of output terminals on the HCB.
The setting is effective to HCBs at all floors.

Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

0: Disabled
Fr-00 Leveling adjustment function 0 - ★
1: Enabled

This parameter is used to enable the leveling adjustment function.

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Fr-01 Leveling adjustment record 1 30030 mm ★
Fr-02 Leveling adjustment record 2 30030 mm ★
00000–60060
… …
Fr-28 Leveling adjustment record 28 30030 mm ★

- 190 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

These parameters are used to record the leveling adjustment values. Each parameter
records the adjustment information of two floors, and therefore, the adjustment information
of 56 floors can be recorded totally.
The method of viewing the record is shown in the following figure.
Figure 7-8 Viewing the leveling adjustment record
5 4 3 2 1

Second floor First floor

leveling leveling

... > 30: upward leveling adjustment

Maximum
adjustment = 30: no leveling adjustment
range: ±30mm

... < 30: downward leveling adjustment

As shown in the preceding figure, the left two LEDs and the right two LEDs respectively
show the adjustment bases of floor 1 and floor 2. If the value is larger than 30, it is upward
leveling adjustment; if the value is smaller than 30, it is downward leveling adjustment. The
default value "30" indicates that there is no leveling adjustment. The maximum adjustment
range is ±30 mm.
The leveling adjustment method is as follows:
1. Ensure that shaft auto-tuning is completed successfully, and the elevator runs properly
at normal speed.
2. Set Fr-00 to 1 to enable the car leveling adjustment function. Then, the elevator shields
hall calls, automatically runs to the top floor, and keeps the door open after arrival. If the
elevator is at the top floor, it directly keeps the door open.
3. Go into the car, press the top floor button, and the leveling position is changed 1 mm
upward; press the bottom floor button, and the leveling position is changed 1 mm
downward. The value is displayed in the car.
Positive value: up arrow + value, negative value: down arrow + value, adjustment range:
±30 mm
4. After completing adjustment for the current floor, press the top floor button and bottom
floor button in the car at the same time to save the adjustment result. The car display

- 191 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

restores to the normal state. If the leveling position of the current floor need not be
adjusted, press the top floor button and bottom floor button in the car at the same time
to exit the leveling adjustment state. Then, car calls can be registered.
5. Press the door close button, and press the button for the next floor. The elevator runs
to the next floor and keeps the door open after arrival. Then, you can perform leveling
adjustment.
6. After completing adjustment for all floors, set Fr-00 to 0 to disable the leveling
adjustment function. Otherwise, the elevator cannot be used.
Pay attention to the following precautions during the operation:
1. Each time shaft auto-tuning is performed, all leveling adjustment parameters can be
cleared or reserved.
a. If you set F7-26 to 1 on the operation panel or F7 to 1 on the keypad, all leveling
adjustment parameters are reserved.
b. If you set F7-26 to 2 on the operation panel or F7 to 2 on the keypad, all leveling
adjustment parameters are reserved.
2. When the re-leveling function is used, the leveling adjustment function is automatically
shielded and cannot be used.
3. Set FA-15 Bit6 to 1 to allow leveling adjustment.

Group FU: Monitoring Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-03 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0.0 % ●

It displays the percentage of pre-torque current to the rated current (positive/negative

display, indicating driving or braking).

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-04 Logic information 0–65535 0 - ●

It displays the elevator status parameters.

Figure 7-9 Elevator state display
5 4 3 2 1

The LEDs are defined in the following table.

- 192 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Table 7-2 LED display of the elevator state

5 4 3 2 1
Elevator state Car state Door 2 State Door 1 State
00 Inspection state 8 Elevator lock 0 Waiting 0 Waiting state 0 Waiting state
Shaft auto- Idle elevator Door open Door open
01 09 1 To stop 1 1
tuning parking state state
Re-leveling
Door open Door open
02 Micro-leveling 10 at inspection 2 Running 2 2
limit limit
speed
Returning to Emergency
Door close Door close
03 base floor at fire 11 evacuation 3 3
state state
emergency operation
Firefighter Motor auto- Door close Door close
04 12 4 4
operation tuning limit limit
Keypad
05 Fault state 13
control
Attendant Base floor
06 14
operation verification
Automatic
07
running

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-05 Curve information 0–65535 0 - ●

It displays the system running curve information. LEDs 5, 4 and 3 have no display, while
LEDs 2 and 1 show the running curve information.

5 4 3 2 1
No Display Curve Information
00 Standby state 08 Stable-speed running segment
01 Zero-speed start segment 09 Deceleration start segment
02 Zero-speed holding segment 10 Linear deceleration segment
03 Reserved 11 Deceleration end segment
-
04 Startup speed stage 12 Zero speed at stop
05 Acceleration start segment 13 Current stop stage
06 Linear acceleration segment 14 Reserved
07 Acceleration end segment 15 Stop data processing

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-06 Speed reference 0.000–8.000 0 m/s ●

- 193 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-07 Feedback speed 0.000–8.000 0 m/s ●
FU-08 Bus voltage 0–999.9 0 V ●
FU-09 Output voltage 0–999.9 0 V ●
FU-10 Output current 0–655.00 0 A ●
FU-11 Output frequency 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
FU-12 Torque current 0.0–200.0 0 % ●
FU-13 Output torque 0–655.00 0 A ●
FU-14 Output power 0.00–99.99 0 kW ●
FU-15 Present position 0.00–300.00 0 m ●

These parameters display the current performance state of the system (the output torque
and output power supports positive/negative display).

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-16 Communication interference 0–65535 0 - ●

It displays the current communication quality of the system, as described in the following
table.

SPI CAN2 CAN1

communication communication communication
Mod2 Mod1
communication communication

Each LED displays a number indicating the

current communication quality:
Best Interrupted

0123456789
Communication status from strong to weak

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-17 Encoder interference 0–65535 0 - ●

It displays the present encoder interference.

This parameter is defined in the same way as FU-16.

- 194 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-18 Input state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-19 Input state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-20 Input state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-22 Input state 5 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-23 Output state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-24 Output state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-25 Output state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-26 Car input state 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-27 Car output state 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-28 Hall sate 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-29 System state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-30 System state 2 0–65535 0 - ●

The following figure shows an example of the displayed input states.

Figure 7-10 Example of input state display
5 4 3 2 1
A

F B
G

E C

DP
D

State of present Each segment

Present signal No.
signal indicates a signal

Segment ON: active

Segment OFF: inactive

Display 1 0

Meaning Active Inactive

According to the preceding figure, the currently viewed signal 10 (Inspection down) is
1 (Active); besides signal 10, signals 4 (Safety circuit feedback), 5 (Door lock circuit
feedback), 6 (RUN contactor feedback), 7 (Brake contactor feedback), and 8 (Inspection
signal) are active.

- 195 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

FU-19 Input state

LED Seg- FU-18 Input state 1 2
FU-20 Input state 3 FU-22 Input state 5
No. ment
No. Signal No. Signal No. Signal No. Signal
Motor
Up slow-
A 0 Reserved 16 32 overheat 0 Reserved
down 1 signal
signal
Up leveling Down slow-
B 1 17 33 VIP signal 1 Reserved
signal down 1 signal
Down leveling Up slow- Earthquake
C 2 18 34 2 Reserved
signal down 2 signal signal
Door zone Down slow- Security
D 3 19 35 3 Reserved
signal down 2 signal signal
Higher-voltage
Safety circuit Up slow- Service floor
E 4 20 36 4 safety circuit
feedback down 3 signal switchover
1 signal
Fire
Higher-voltage
Door lock Down slow- emergency
F 5 21 37 5 door lock circuit
circuit feedback down 3 signal floor
signal
switchover
Shorting door
RUN contactor lock circuit Parking floor
G 6 22 38 6 Reserved
feedback contactor switchover
feedback
Down
Firefighter
Brake contactor collective
DP 7 23 operation 39 7 Reserved
feedback selective
signal
switch
Door Peak
Inspection
A 8 24 machine 1 40 service 8 Reserved
signal
light curtain switch
Door Fire
B 9 Inspection up 25 machine 2 41 emergency 9 Reserved
light curtain start signal
Brake
Inspection Back door
C 10 26 contactor 42 10 Reserved
down selection
feedback 2
Fire emergency Back door
2 D 11 27 EPS input 43 11 Reserved
signal forbidden
Elevator lock Light-load
E 12 Up limit signal 28 44 12 Reserved
input signal
Down limit Safety circuit Half-load
F 13 29 45 13 Reserved
signal 2 signal signal
Shorting
Double
PMSM stator
G 14 Overload signal 30 46 door control 14 Reserved
contactor
signal
feedback
DP 15 Full-load signal 31 Reserved 47 Motor input 15 Reserved

- 196 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

FU-23 Output state FU-24 Output FU-25 Output state FU-26 Car input
LED Seg- 1 state 2 3 state
No. ment
No. Signal No. Signal No. Signal No. Signal
Higher-
voltage Door 1 light
A 0 Reserved 16 0
startup of curtain
brake
Elevator
RUN contactor Door 2 light
B 1 17 running in up 1
control curtain
direction
Brake contactor Lamp/Fan Door 1 open
C 2 18 2
control running limit
Shorting door
lock circuit Medical Door 2 open
1 D 3 19 3
contactor sterilization limit
control
Fire emergency
Non-door Door 1 close
E 4 floor arrival 20 4
zone stop limit
signal feedback
Door machine Door 2 close
F 5 21 Electric lock 5
1 open limit
Re- Re-
Door machine Non-service served served
G 6 22 6 Full-load input
1 close state
Door machine
DP 7 23 Reserved 7 Overload input
2 open
Door machine
A 8 24 Reserved 8 Light-load input
2 close
B 9 Reserved 25 Reserved 9 Reserved
C 10 Fault state 26 Reserved 10 Reserved
Running
D 11 27 Reserved 11 Reserved
monitor
2 Running
E 12 28 Reserved 12 Reserved
monitor
Shorting PMSM
F 13 29 Reserved 13 Reserved
stator contactor
G 14 Reserved 30 Reserved 14 Reserved
Emergency
DP 15 31 Reserved 15 Reserved
buzzer control

- 197 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

FU-27 Car output FU-29 System state FU-30 System state

LED Seg- FU-28 Hall sate
state 1 2
No. ment
No. Signal No. Signal No. Signal No. Signal
Lamp/Fan Door open 1 Up direction
A 0 0 Reserved 0 0
running button display
Elevator lock Door close Down direction
B 1 Door 1 open 1 1 1
signal 1 button display
Fire
Door open
C 2 Door 1 close 2 emergency 2 2 Running state
delay 1
signal
Forced door Current floor Direct travel
D 3 3 3 3 System full-load
close 1 forbidden ride switch

1 Attendant System
E 4 Door 2 open 4 VIP signal 4 4
switch overload
Direction
Security System half-
F 5 Door 2 close 5 5 change 5
signal load
switch
Independent
Forced door Service floor System light-
G 6 6 6 running 6
close 2 switchover load
switch
Fire
Parking floor Commissioning
DP 7 Up arrival gong 7 7 emergency 7
switchover valid
2 switch
Down
Down arrival collective Maintenance
A 8 gong 8 8 8
selective Door open 2 valid
switch button
Peak service Door close Peak service
B 9 Reserved 9 9 9
switch 2 button enabled
Fire
emergency Door open
2 C 10 Reserved 10 10 10 Reserved
floor delay 2
switchover
D 11 11 11 11
E 12 12 12 12
F 13 Reserved 13 Reserved 13 Reserved 13 Reserved
G 14 14 14 14
DP 15 15 15 15

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-31 Car load 0–255 0 - ●

It displays the current car load.

- 198 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-32 Nearest landing floor 1–56 0 - ●
FU-33 Destination floor 1–56 0 - ●

These parameters display the nearest floor that the elevator can land and the destination
floor.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-34 Stop time 0.0–60.0 0 s ●

It displays the time required for this running. "60" is displayed at stop.

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-35 Deceleration distance 0.0–100.0 0 s ●

It displays the deceleration distance from the rated elevator speed to zero speed under the
current setting of deceleration parameters (deceleration speed and time).

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-49 Mod1 communication state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-50 Mod1 communication state2 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-51 Mod1 communication state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-52 Mod1 communication state 4 0–65535 0 - ●

These parameter display the Mod1 communication state between the HCB of all floors and
the MCB.
Each parameter specify different floor addresses:
•• State 1: floors 1–16
•• State 2: floors 17–32
•• State 3: floors 33–48
•• State 4: floors 49–56
Figure 7-11 Viewing Mod1 communication state between HCBs and MCB

5 4 3 2 1

Communication
Address of the
Present address state of present
HCB at each floor
address

Segment ON: communication normal

Segment OFF: communication abnormal

Display 1 0

Meaning Normal Interrupted

- 199 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

As shown in the preceding figure, LEDs 5, 4, and 3 indicate whether communication of the
present viewed address is normal or interrupted.
LEDs 1 and 2 indicate the communication states of 16 addresses, where each segment
indicates one address, and segment ON means normal and segment OFF means
interrupted.
The addresses indicated by segments of LEDs 1 and 2 for FU-49 to FU-52 are listed in the
following table.

Function
FU-49 FU-50 FU-51 FU-52
Code

2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
9 1 25 17 49 41 33
LEDs 1 14 10 6 2 30 26 22 18 54 50 46 42 38 34
15 7 31 23 55 47 39
and 2
13 11 5 3 29 27 21 19 53 51 45 43 37 35

12 16 4 8 28 32 20 24 52 56 44 48 36 40

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FU-53 Mod2 communication state 1 0–65535 0 - ●

FU-54 Mod2 communication state 2 0–65535 0 - ●

FU-55 Mod2 communication state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FU-56 Mod2 communication state 4 0–65535 0 - ●
These parameter display the Mod2 communication state between the HCB of all floors and
the MCB.
Mod2 is used for opposite door control and disability calls.
Mod2 is defined in the similar way as Mod1.

Group FP: User Parameters

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FP-00 User password 0–65535 0 - ☆

It is used to set the user password.

If it is set to any non-zero number, the password protection function is enabled. After a
password has been set and taken effect, you must enter the correct password in order to
enter the menu. If the entered password is incorrect, you cannot view or modify parameters.
If FP-00 is set to 00000, the previously set user password is cleared, and the password
protection function is disabled.
Remember the password that you set. If the password is set incorrectly or forgotten, contact
Monarch to replace the control board.

- 200 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 7 Description of Function Codes

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

FP-01 Parameter update 0–4 0 - ★

It is used to set processing on the parameters.

The values are as follows:
•• 0: No operation
•• 1: Restore default settings
•• 2: Clear fault records
•• 3: Restore logic board parameters
•• 4: Restore all parameter setting

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

0: Invalid
FP-02 User-defined parameter display 0 - ★
1: Valid

It is used to set whether to display the parameters that are modified.

When it is set to 1, the parameters that are different from the default setting are displayed.

Groups E: Fault Details

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Group E0: 1st fault information
E0-00 1st fault code 0–6299 0 - ●
E0-01 1st fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-02 1st fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
E0-03 1st fault hour and minute 0–2359 0 HH.MM ●
E0-04 1st fault logic information 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-05 1st fault curve information 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-06 Speed reference upon 1st fault 0.000–8.000 0 m/s ●
E0-07 Feedback speed upon 1st fault 0.000–8.000 0 m/s ●
E0-08 Bus voltage upon 1st fault 0–999.9 0 V ●
E0-09 Output voltage upon 1st fault 0–999.9 0 V ●
E0-10 Output current upon 1st fault 0–655.00 0 A ●
Output frequency upon 1st
E0-11 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
fault
E0-12 Output torque upon 1st fault 0–100 0 % ●
E0-13 Torque current upon 1st fault 0–655.00 0 A ●
E0-14 Output power upon 1st fault 0.00–99.99 0 kW ●
E0-15 Present position upon 1st fault 0.00–300.00 0 m ●

- 201 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7 Description of Function Codes NICE7000 User Manual

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Communication interference
E0-16 0–65535 0 - ●
upon 1st fault
Encoder interference upon 1st
E0-17 0–65535 0 - ●
fault
E0-18 Input state 1 upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-19 Input state 2 upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-20 Input state 3 upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-21 Input state 4 upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-22 Input state 5 upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-23 Output state 1 upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-24 Output state 2 upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-25 Output state 3 upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-26 Car input state upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-27 Car output state upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-28 Hall sate upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-29 System state 1 upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-30 System state 2 upon 1st fault 0–65535 0 - ●
E0-31 Car load upon 1st fault 0–255 0 - ●
Group E1 to E9: details of the later 9 faults

Group E0 to E9 display the details of the last 10 faults.

The parameters are defined in the same way as group FU parameters.
Each time a new fault occurs, the details of this fault are recorded in group E0, and the
previous fault is recorded in group E1. When group E is full, more faults are recorded in
group FC.
When a fault is designated in FC-00, E9 is used to record details of this designated fault and
not counted here.

- 202 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8
Troubleshooting

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8 Troubleshooting NICE7000 User Manual

Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

8.1 Maintenance
8.1.1 Routine Maintenance

DANGER

Never perform wiring at power-on. Cut off all power supplies and wait for at least ten minutes so
that the residual voltage on capacitors can discharge safely.

The influence of the ambient temperature, humidity, dust and vibration will cause the aging
of the components inside the controller, which may cause potential faults or reduce the
service life of the controller. Therefore, it is necessary to carry out routine and periodic
maintenance.
Routine maintenance involves checking:
•• Whether abnormal noise exists during motor running
•• Whether the motor vibrates excessively
•• Whether the installation environment of the controller changes
•• Whether the cooling fan works properly
•• Whether the controller overheats
Routine cleaning involves:
•• Keep the controller clean all the time.
•• Remove the dust, especially metal powder on the surface of the controller, to prevent
the dust from entering the controller.
•• Clear the oil stain on the cooling fan of the controller.

8.1.2 Periodic Inspection

Perform periodic inspection on the items that are difficult to check during running. Periodic
inspection involves:
•• Check and clean the air filter periodically.
•• Check whether the screws become loose.
•• Check whether the controller is corroded.
•• Check whether the wiring terminals have arc signs.
•• Carry out the main circuit insulation test.

- 204 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 8 Troubleshooting

Note

Before measuring the insulating resistance with megameter (500 VDC megameter
recommended), disconnect the main circuit from the controller. Do not use the
insulating resistance meter to test the insulation of the control circuit. The high voltage
test need not be performed again because it has been completed before delivery.

8.1.3 Replacement of Vulnerable Components

Vulnerable components of the controller include the cooling fan and filter electrolytic
capacitor. Their service life is related to the operating environment and maintenance.
The service life of the two components is listed in the following table.
Table 8-1 Service life of cooling fan and filter electrolytic capacitor

Possible Damage
Component Service Life Judging Criteria
Cause
•• Check whether there is crack on the
•• Bearing worn blade.
Fan 2 to 3 years
•• Blade aging •• Check whether there is abnormal
vibration noise upon startup.
•• Input power supply
in poor quality •• Check whether there is liquid leakage.
•• High ambient •• Check whether the safety valve has
Electrolytic temperature projected.
4 to 5 years
capacitor
•• Frequent load •• Measure the static capacitance.
jumping
•• Measure the insulating resistance.
•• Electrolytic aging

The service life is obtained based on the following conditions:

Ambient temperature: average 30°C per year
Load rate: below 80%
Running time: less than 20 hours per day

8.1.4 Storage of the Controller

For storage of the controller, pay attention to the following two aspects:
1. Pack the controller with the original packing box provided by Monarch.
2. Long-term storage degrades the electrolytic capacitor. Thus, the controller must be
energized once every 2 years, each time lasting at least 5 hours. The input voltage must
be increased slowly to the rated value with the regulator.

8.2 Description of Fault Levels

The NICE7000 has almost 60 pieces of alarm information and protective functions. It
monitors various input signals, running conditions and feedback signals. If a fault occurs, the
system implements the relevant protective function and displays the fault code.

- 205 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8 Troubleshooting NICE7000 User Manual

The controller is a complicated electronic control system and the displayed fault information
is graded into five levels according to the severity. The faults of different levels are handled
according to the following table.
Table 8-2 Fault levels

Category Action Remarks

1. Display the fault code.
1A. The elevator running is not affected on any
Level 1 2. Output the fault relay action condition.
command.
1. Display fault code. 2A. The parallel/group control function is disabled.
2. Output the fault relay action
Level 2 command.
2B. The door pre-open/re-leveling function is
3. Continue normal running of disabled.
the elevator.
3A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops at
1. Display the fault code.
special deceleration rate, and cannot restart.
2. Output the fault relay action
Level 3 command. 3B. In low-speed running, the elevator does not
stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator stops,
3. Stop output and apply the
and then can start running at low speed after a
brake immediately after stop.
delay of 3s.
4A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops under
special deceleration rate, and cannot restart.
1. Display the fault code. 4B. In low-speed running, the elevator does not
2. Output the fault relay action stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator stops,
command. and then can start running at low speed after a
Level 4
3. In distance control, the delay of 3s.
elevator decelerates to stop and 4C. In low-speed running, the elevator does not
cannot run again. stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator stops,
and then can start running at low speed after a
delay of 3s.

1. Display the fault code. 5A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops
immediately and cannot restart.
2. Output the fault relay action
Level 5 command. 5B. In low-speed running, the elevator does not
stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator stops,
3. The elevator stops
and then can start running at low speed after a
immediately.
delay of 3s.

Note

A, B, and C are fault sub-category.

Low-speed running involves inspection, emergency evacuation, shaft auto-tuning, re-leveling,
motor auto-tuning, base floor verification, and running in operation panel control.
Normal-speed running involves automatic running, returning to base floor in fire emergency state,
firefighter operation, attendant operation, elevator lock, and elevator parking.

- 206 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 8 Troubleshooting

8.3 Fault Information and Troubleshooting

If an alarm is reported, the system performs corresponding processing based on the fault level.
You can handle the fault according to the possible causes described in the following table.
Table 8-3 Fault codes and troubleshooting
Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
•• The main circuit •• Check whether the RUN contactor
output is grounded or at the controller output side is
short circuited. normal.
•• Motor auto-tuning is •• Check:
performed improperly.
Overcurrent -- Whether the power cable jacket
Err02 during •• The load is too heavy. is damaged 5A
acceleration
•• The encoder signal is -- Whether the power cable is
incorrect. possibly short circuited to ground
•• The EPS running -- Whether the power cable is
feedback signal is connected reliably
incorrect.
•• Check the insulation of motor
power terminals, and check
whether the motor winding is
short-circuited or grounded.
•• Check whether shorting PMSM
stator causes controller output
short circuit.
•• The main circuit •• Check whether motor parameters
output is grounded or comply with the nameplate.
short circuited.
•• Perform motor auto-tuning again.
•• Motor auto-tuning is
Overcurrent performed improperly. •• Check whether the brake keeps
Err03 during released before the fault occurs 5A
•• The load is too heavy. and whether the brake is stuck
deceleration
•• The deceleration rate mechanically.
is too short. •• Check whether the balance
•• The encoder signal is coefficient is correct.
incorrect. •• Check whether the encoder
wirings are correct. For
asynchronous motor, perform
SVC and compare the current to
judge whether the encoder works
properly.
(To be continued)

- 207 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8 Troubleshooting NICE7000 User Manual

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
•• Check
-- Whether the encoder is installed
reliably
•• The main circuit
output is grounded or -- Whether the rotating shaft is
short circuited. connected to the motor shaft
reliably
•• Motor auto-tuning is
Overcurrent at performed properly. -- Whether the encoder is stable
Err04 5A
constant speed during normal-speed running
•• The load is too heavy.
•• Check whether EPS feedback is
•• The encoder is
valid in the non-EPS running state
seriously interfered
(E02).
with.
•• Check whether the acceleration/
deceleration rate is too high (E02,
E03).
•• The input voltage is
too high.
•• The regeneration
power of the motor is
Overvoltage too high. •• Adjust the input voltage. Observe
Err05 during •• The braking whether the bus voltage is normal 5A
acceleration resistance is too and whether it rises too quickly
large, or the braking during running.
unit fails. •• Check for the balance coefficient.
•• The acceleration rate •• Select a proper regen. resistor
is too short. and check whether the resistance
•• The input voltage is is too large based on the
too high. recommended braking resistance
table in chapter 3.
•• The braking
Overvoltage •• Check:
resistance is too
Err06 during 5A
large, or the braking
deceleration -- Whether the cable connecting the
unit fails.
regen. resistor is damaged
•• The deceleration rate
-- Whether the cooper wire touches
is too short.
the ground
•• The input voltage is
too high. -- Whether the connection is reliable
Overvoltage at •• The braking
Err07 5A
constant speed resistance is too
large, or the braking
unit fails.

- 208 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 8 Troubleshooting

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
•• Check that the external power
supply is stable and that the
•• The external power power input cables are connected
Pre-charge supply is not stable. securely.
Err08 relay not close 5A
•• A hardware fault •• Do not power on the device again
at power-on
occurs. when power-off is incomplete.
•• Contact the agent or Monarch if
the cause is hardware fault.
•• Instantaneous power
•• Eliminate external power supply
failure occurs on the
faults and check whether the
input power supply.
power fails during running.
Err09 Undervoltage •• The input voltage is 5A
•• Check whether the wiring of all
too low.
power input cables is secure.
•• The drive control
•• Contact the agent or Monarch.
board fails.
•• Check the brake circuit and power
input.
•• The brake circuit is
abnormal. •• Reduce the load.

•• The load is too heavy. •• Check whether the encoder

feedback signal and setting are
•• The encoder feedback correct, and whether the initial
Controller
Err10 signal is abnormal. angle of the encoder for the 4A
overload
PMSM is correct.
•• The motor parameters
are incorrect. •• Check the motor parameter setting
and perform motor auto-tuning.
•• A fault occurs on the
motor power cables. •• Check the power cables of the
motor (refer to the solution of
Err02).
•• FC-02 is set
improperly. •• Adjust the parameter (FC-02 can
Err11 Motor overload •• The brake circuit is be set to the default value). 3A
abnormal. •• Refer to the solution of Err10.
•• The load is too heavy.
•• Check whether the three phases
•• The power input
of power supply are balanced
phases are not
Power supply and whether the power voltage is
Err12 symmetric. 4A
phase loss normal. If not, adjust the power
•• The drive control input.
board fails.
•• Contact the agent or Monarch.

- 209 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8 Troubleshooting NICE7000 User Manual

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
•• The output wiring of •• Check the wiring.
the main circuit is
Power output loose. •• Check whether the contactor on
Err13 4A
phase loss the output side is normal.
•• The motor is
damaged. •• Eliminate the motor fault.

•• The ambient •• Lower the ambient temperature.

temperature is too •• Clear the air filter.
high.
Module •• Replace the damaged fan.
Err14 5A
overheat •• The fan is damaged.
•• Check whether the installation
•• The air filter is clearance of the controller satisfies
blocked. the requirement.
1, 2, 3:
1: The excitation current •• Check the circuit of the encoder.
deviation is too large.
•• The output MCCB becomes OFF.
2: The torque current
Err16
Current control
deviation is too large. •• The values of the current loop 5A
fault parameters are too small.
3: The torque limit is
exceeded for a very long •• Perform motor auto-tuning again if
time. the zero-point position is incorrect.
•• Reduce the load if it is too heavy.
2, 3:
2: The deviation between •• Check whether the encoder runs
the Z signal position and properly.
the absolute position is
Reference •• Check whether the encoder wiring
too large.
signal of is correct and reliable.
Err17 3: The deviation 5A
the encoder
between the absolute •• Check whether the PG card wiring
incorrect
position angle and the is correct.
accumulative angle
•• Check whether the grounding of
exceeds 70°.
the control cabinet and the motor
is normal.
Current The drive control board
Err18 Contact the agent or Monarch. 5A
detection fault fails.

- 210 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 8 Troubleshooting

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
101, 102:
•• Enter the motor parameters
correctly.
•• Check the motor wiring and
whether phase loss occurs on the
101, 102: contactor at the output side.
Motor auto-
Err19 The motor auto-tuning 5A
tuning fault •• Check the encoder wiring and
times out. ensure that the encoder PPR is
set properly.
•• Check whether the inspection
button is released before the
PMSM with-load auto-tuning is
finished.
1: AB signals are lost
during auto-tuning.
4: Z signal cannot be
detected during auto-
tuning.
5: The CD signal cables
of the SIN/COS encoder
break.
7: The UVW cables of
the UVW encoder break.
1 to 19:
8: Reserved.
•• Check that the setting of F1-
9: Overspeed occurs or 00, F1-12, and F1-25 for the
the speed deviation is synchronous motor is correct.
too large.
Speed •• Check that there is no mechanical
10/11: AB signals or CD
Err20 feedback stuck. 5A
signals of the SIN/COS
incorrect encoder are interfered •• Check that the brake has been
with. released during running.
12: The detected speed
55:
is 0 at torque limit.
Check that the grounding is reliable
13: AB signals are lost
and eliminate interference problems.
during running.
14: Z signal is lost during
running.
19: The AB analog signal
cables break during low-
speed running.
55: CD signal error
or serious Z signal
interference occurs
during auto-tuning.

- 211 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8 Troubleshooting NICE7000 User Manual

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
101:
•• Check whether the leveling and
door zone sensors work properly.
101: The leveling •• Check the installation verticality
Leveling signal position deviation is too and depth of the leveling plates.
Err22 1A
abnormal large in elevator auto-
running state. •• Check the leveling signal input
points of the MCB.
•• Check whether the steel rope
slips.
101:
101: The RTC clock
Err24 RTC clock fault information of the MCB •• Replace the clock battery. 3B
is abnormal.
•• Replace the MCB.
101, 102:
Storage data 101, 102:
Err25 The storage data of the 4A
abnormal Contact the agent or Monarch.
MCB is abnormal.
101: Check that the earthquake
101: The earthquake
Earthquake signal is consistent with the
Err26 signal is active and the 3B
signal parameter setting (NC, NO) of the
duration exceeds 2s.
MCB.
101:
•• Check that the state (NO, NC)
of the feedback contact on the
Shorting contactor is correct.
101: The shorting
PMSM stator
Err29
feedback
PMSM stator feedback •• Check that the contactor and 5A
is abnormal. corresponding feedback contact
abnormal
act correctly.
•• Check the coil circuit of the
shorting PMSM stator contactor.
101, 102:
•• Check whether the leveling signal
cables are connected reliably and
101, 102: whether the signal copper wires
In the normal-speed may touch the ground or be short
Elevator running or re-leveling circuited with other signal cables.
Err30 position running mode, the 4A
abnormal •• Check whether the distance
running time is smaller
between two floors is too large,
than the smaller of F9-
causing too long re-leveling
02.
running time.
•• Check whether signal loss exists
in the encoder circuits.

- 212 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 8 Troubleshooting

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
1: Decrease the inspection speed or
perform motor auto-tuning again.
2:
1: Overspeed occurs
during inspection or •• Check that the encoder is normal.
shaft auto-tuning.
•• Set the motor nameplate
2: The running speed parameters correctly
exceeds 1.15 times of
Emergency the maximum speed •• Perform motor auto-tuning again.
Err31 running (F0-03).
3:
abnormal 3: The speeds during
•• Check that the shorting PMSM
shorting motor stator
stator contactor function is
braking mode and
enabled.
emergency running
exceed 1/2 of the rated •• Check that the EPS capacity is
speed. proper.
•• Check that the emergency running
speed is set properly.
101: The detected
running speed during 101:
normal-speed running •• Check whether the encoder is
exceeds the limit. used properly.
102: The speed
exceeds the limit during •• Check the setting of motor
inspection or shaft auto- nameplate parameters. Perform
tuning. motor auto-tuning again.
103: The speed exceeds 102: Attempt to decrease the
the limit in shorting inspection speed or perform motor
Elevator speed
Err33 stator braking mode. auto-tuning again. 5A
abnormal
104: The speed 103: Check whether the shorting
exceeds the limit during PMSM stator function is enabled.
emergency running. 104, 105:
105: The emergency •• Check whether the emergency
running time protection power capacity meets the
function is enabled (set requirements.
in Bit8 of F6-45), and the
running time exceeds •• Check whether the emergency
50s, causing the timeout running speed is set properly.
fault.
Logic of the MCB is
Err34 Logic fault Contact the agent or Monarch. 5A
abnormal.

- 213 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8 Troubleshooting NICE7000 User Manual

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
1, 10:
Pulse verification is
incorrect or shaft auto-
tuning is not performed.
1.10: Perform shat auto-tuning again.
2: The pulses are
2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 11:
smaller than the base
value; the pulse direction •• Check whether the elevator
may be incorrect. running direction is consistent with
the pulse change in F4-03: F4-
3, 4:
03 increases in up direction and
The leveling plate is too decreases in down direction. If
large; the pulse direction not, change the value of F0-05 to
may be incorrect. ensure consistency.
5: No leveling signal is
•• Check that NO/NC setting of the
received within 45s shaft
leveling sensor is set correctly.
auto-tuning.
7: The leveling signal •• Check whether the leveling plates
remains active within are inserted properly and whether
45s shaft auto-tuning. there is strong power interference
if the leveling sensor signal blinks.
8: The floor height
learned by shaft auto- 5: Check whether the running times
Shaft auto- tuning is too short. out: No leveling signal is received
Err35 tuning data 9: The current floor is when the running time exceeds F9- 4C
abnormal not top floor before shaft 02.
auto-tuning ends; the 8: Enable the super short floor
position of the up slow- function if the floor distance is less
down switch may be than 50 cm. If the floor distance is
incorrect. normal, check installation of the
11: Pulse verification is leveling plate for this floor and check
incorrect. the sensor.
12: The directions of 9: Check whether the setting of
up and down leveling F6-00 (Top floor of the elevator) is
signals are reversed. smaller than the actual condition.
101: When shaft auto- 12: Check that the up and down
tuning is started, the leveling signals are set correctly.
elevator is not at the 101: Check that the next slow-
bottom floor or the down down switch is valid, and that F4-01
slow-down is invalid. (Current floor) is set to 1.
102: The system is not 102: Check that the inspection switch
in the inspection state is in inspection state.
when shaft auto-tuning
103: Perform shaft auto-tuning.
is performed.
103: It is judged upon
power-on that shaft auto-
tuning is not performed.

- 214 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 8 Troubleshooting

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
101, 102: The feedback
of the RUN contactor is
active, but the contactor
has no output. 101, 102, 103, 104:
103: The controller •• Check whether the feedback
RUN contactor outputs the RUN signal contact of the contactor acts
Err36 feedback but receives no RUN properly. 5A
abnormal feedback within 2s.
104: When both •• Check the signal feature (NO, NC)
feedback signals of of the feedback contact.
the RUN contactor are
enabled, their states are
inconsistent.
101: The output of 101, 102:
the brake contactor is •• Check whether the brake coil and
inconsistent with the feedback contact are correct.
Brake feedback.
Err37
contactor •• Check the signal feature (NO, NC) 5A
feedback 102: When both
of the feedback contact.
abnormal feedback signals of the
brake contactor are •• Check whether the control circuit
enabled, their states are of the brake contactor coil is
inconsistent. normal.
1: SVC is used for non-
inspection running in
distance control. 1 to 4:
2: In non auto-leveling •• Check whether the encoder is
or shaft auto-tuning used correctly.
state, the elevator runs •• Check whether the motor running
in the opposite direction direction is correct.
Encoder signal for more than 10 cm
Err38 5A
abnormal (subcode 2 reported for •• Check whether the system
up direction, subcode 3 grounding and signal grounding
for down direction). are reliable.
3: In non auto-leveling or •• Check whether wiring between
shaft auto-tuning state of the encoder and the PG card is
CLVC, the running time correct.
exceeds FH-03 and the
F4-03 does not change.
101:
•• Check whether the thermal
protection relay is normal.
101: The motor overheat
Err39 Motor overheat relay input remains valid •• Check whether the motor is 3A
for a certain time. used properly and whether it is
damaged.
•• Improve cooling conditions of
the motor.

- 215 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8 Troubleshooting NICE7000 User Manual

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
Elevator
The set elevator running Check the related parameter, or
Err40 running 4B
time is reached. contact the agent or Monarch.
reached
101:
•• Check the safety circuit switches
and their states.
•• Check whether the external power
Safety circuit 101: The safety circuit supply is normal.
Err41 5A
disconnected signal becomes OFF.
•• Check whether the safety circuit
contactor acts properly.
•• Confirm the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact of the
safety circuit contactor.
101:
•• Check whether the hall door lock
and the car door lock are in good
contact.
101: The door lock •• Check whether the door lock
Door lock
circuit feedback is invalid contactor acts properly.
Err42 disconnected 5A
during the elevator
during running
running. •• Check the signal feature (NO, NC)
of the feedback contact on the
door lock contactor.
•• Check whether the external power
supply is normal.
101:
•• Check the signal feature (NO, NC)
of the up limit switch.
101: The up limit switch •• Check whether the up limit switch
Up limit signal acts when the elevator is in good contact.
Err43 4C
abnormal is running in the up
direction. •• Check whether the limit switch is
installed at a relatively low position
and acts even when the elevator
arrives at the terminal floor
normally.

- 216 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 8 Troubleshooting

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
101:
•• Check the signal feature (NO, NC)
of the down limit switch.

Down limit
101: The down limit •• Check whether the down limit
switch acts when the switch is in good contact.
Err44 signal 4C
elevator is running in the
abnormal •• Check whether the limit switch
down direction.
is installed at a relatively high
position and thus acts even when
the elevator arrives at the terminal
floor normally.
1: The up slow-down 1
is abnormal.
2: The up slow-down 1
is stuck.
3: The up slow-down 2
is abnormal.
4: The up slow-down 2
is stuck.
5: The up slow-down 3
is abnormal.
6: The up slow-down 3
is stuck.
7: The down slow-down
1 is abnormal. 1 to 14:
8: The down slow-down •• Check the positions of the slow-
1 is stuck. down switches.
Slow-down
Err45 switch position 9: The down slow-down •• Check whether the up slow-down 4B
abnormal 2 is abnormal. and the down slow-down are in
10: The down slow-down good contact.
2 is stuck.
11: The down slow-down
3 is abnormal.
12: The down slow-down
3 is stuck.
13: The up slow-down
position during shaft
auto-tuning is smaller
than S = V x V/2a + V x
0.3 + 0.1.
14: The down slow-down
position during shaft
auto-tuning is smaller
than S = V x V/2a + V x
0.3 + 0.1.

- 217 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8 Troubleshooting NICE7000 User Manual

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
101: The leveling signal 101: Check whether the leveling
Re-leveling signal is normal.
Err46 is inactive during re- 2B
abnormal
leveling.
101: During re-leveling
or pre-open running,
the shorting door lock
circuit contactor outputs
101, 102:
for continuous 2s, but
the feedback is invalid •• Check the signal feature (NO, NC)
and the door lock is of the feedback contact on the
disconnected. shorting door lock circuit contactor.
Shorting door 102: During re-leveling •• Check whether the shorting door
lock circuit or pre-open running, the lock circuit contactor acts properly.
Err47 2B
contactor shorting door lock circuit
abnormal contactor has no output, 103:
but the feedback is valid •• Check whether the leveling and
for continuous 2s. re-leveling signals are normal.
103: During re-leveling
•• Check whether the re-leveling
or pre-open running,
speed is set too low.
the output time of the
shorting door lock circuit
contactor is larger than
15s.
101:
101: The consecutive •• Check whether the door machine
times that the door does system works properly.
Err48 Door open fault not open to the limit 5A
reaches the setting in •• Check whether the CTB is normal.
Fb-13. •• Check whether the door open limit
signal is normal.
101: The consecutive 101:
times that the door does •• Check whether the door machine
not open to the limit system works properly.
Door close reaches the setting in
Err49 5A
fault Fb-13. •• Check whether the CTB is normal.
•• Check whether the door lock acts
properly.

- 218 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 8 Troubleshooting

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code

101:
•• Check the communication cable
connection.

101: Feedback data of •• Check the power supply of the

CAN CTB.
CANbus communication
Err51 communication 1A
with the CTB remains
abnormal •• Check whether the 24 V power
incorrect.
supply of the controller is normal.
•• Check whether strong-power
interference on communication
exists.

101:
•• Check the communication cable
connection.

101: Feedback data of •• Check whether the 24 V power

HCB supply of the controller is normal.
Modbus communication
Err52 communication 1A
with the HCB remains
abnormal •• Check whether the HCB
incorrect.
addresses are repeated.
•• Check whether strong-power
interference on communication
exists.
101:
•• Check whether the door lock
circuit is normal.
•• Check whether the feedback
101: The door lock contact of the door lock contactor
feedback signal remains acts properly.
active for more than 3s
Door lock fault during door open. •• Check whether the system
Err53 receives the door open limit signal 5A
102: The multiple door
lock feedback signal when the door lock signal is valid.
states are inconsistent 102:
for more than 2s.
Check whether when the hall door
lock signal and the car door lock
signal are detected separately, the
detected states of the hall door locks
and car door lock are inconsistent.
101: During automatic
running of the elevator,
Stop at another 101: Check the door open limit signal
Err55 the door open time 1A
landing floor at the present floor.
exceeds the limit set in
Fb-10.

- 219 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8 Troubleshooting NICE7000 User Manual

Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
Serial 101, 102: Check the wiring between
The SPI communication
peripheral the control board and the drive
is abnormal. No correct
Err57 interface (SPI) board. 5A
data is received with 2s
communication
of DSP communication. 103: Contact the agent or Monarch.
abnormal
1:
1:
•• The up slow-down
•• Check whether the states (NO,
and down slow-down
NC) of the slow-down switches
are disconnected
Shaft position and limit switches are consistent
simultaneously.
Err58 switches with the parameter setting of the 4B
abnormal •• The up limit MCB.
feedback and down
•• Check whether malfunction of
limit feedback
the slow-down switches and limit
are disconnected
switches exists.
simultaneously.
1: The up and down
leveling signals are lost.
2: The up leveling signal
and door zone signals
1 to 4:
are lost.
Leveling signal Check whether the leveling signals
Err60 3: The down leveling 3B
abnormal and related parameters are set
signal and door zone
correctly.
signals are lost.
4: All the up and down
leveling signals and door
zone signals are lost.
1: The door zone signal
is stuck.
2: The up and down
leveling signals are
stuck.
3: The up leveling signal 1 to 5:
Leveling signal and door zone signals Check whether the leveling signals
Err61 3A
abnormal are stuck. and related parameters are set
4: The down leveling correctly.
signal and door zone
signals are stuck.
5: All the up and down
leveling signals and door
zone signals are stuck.

- 220 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 8 Troubleshooting

Note

•• Fault Err41 is not recorded in the elevator stop state.

•• Fault Err42 is reset automatically when the door lock circuit is shorted or 1s after the fault
occurs in the door zone.
•• If faults Err51, Err52, and Err57 persist, they are recorded once every one hour.
•• Except the fault code and level, the number (such as 1, 101) indicates the fault subcode.

- 221 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8 Troubleshooting NICE7000 User Manual

- 222 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 9
EMC

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 9 EMC NICE7000 User Manual

Chapter 9 EMC

9.1 Definition of Terms

1. EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) describes the ability of electronic and electrical
devices or systems to work properly in the electromagnetic environment and not to
generate electromagnetic interference that influences other local devices or systems.
In other words, EMC includes two aspects: The electromagnetic interference generated
by a device or system must be restricted within a certain limit; the device or system must
have sufficient immunity to the electromagnetic interference in the environment.
2. First environment
Environment that includes domestic premises, it also includes establishments directly
connected without intermediate transformers to a low-voltage power supply network
which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes
3. Second environment
Environment that includes all establishments other than those directly connected to a
low-voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes
4. Category C1 Controller
Power Drive System (PDS) of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the
first environment
5. Category C2 Controller
PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, which is neither a plug in device nor a movable
device and, when used in the first environment, is intended to be installed and
commissioned only by a professional
6. Category C3 Controller
PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the second environment and
not intended for use in the first environment
7. Category C4 Controller
PDS of rated voltage equal to or above 1 000 V, or rated current equal to or above 400
A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment

9.2 Introduction to EMC Standard

9.2.1 Installation Environment

The system manufacturer using the controller is responsible for compliance of the system
with the European EMC directive. Based on the application of the system, the integrator
must ensure that the system complies with standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2, C3 or
C4.

- 224 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 9 EMC

The system (machinery or appliance) installed with the controller must also have the CE
mark. The system integrator is responsible for compliance of the system with the EMC
directive and standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2.

WARNING
If applied in the first environment, the controller may generate radio interference. Besides the
CE compliance described in this chapter, users must take measures to avoid such interference,
if necessary.

9.2.2 Requirements on Satisfying the EMC Directive

1. The controller requires an external EMC filter. The recommended filter models are listed
in Table 9-1. The cable connecting the filter and the controller should be as short as
possible and be not longer than 30 cm. Furthermore, install the filter and the controller
on the same metal plate, and ensure that the grounding terminal of the controller and
the grounding point of the filter are in good contact with the metal plate.
2. Select the motor and the control cable according to the description of the cable in
section 9.4.
3. Install the controller and arrange the cables according to the cabling and grounding in
section 9.4.
4. Install an AC reactor to restrict the current harmonics. For the recommended models,
see Table 9-2.

9.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices

9.3.1 Installation of EMC Input Filter on Power Input Side

An EMC filter installed between the controller and the power supply can not only restrict the
interference of electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment on the controller, but
also prevents the interference from the controller on the surrounding equipment.
The NICE7000 controller satisfies the requirements of category C2 only with an EMC filter
installed on the power input side. The installation precautions are as follows:
•• Strictly comply with the ratings when using the EMC filter. The EMC filter is category
I electric apparatus, and therefore, the metal housing ground of the filter should be
in good contact with the metal ground of the installation cabinet on a large area, and
requires good conductive continuity. Otherwise, it will result in electric shock or poor
EMC effect.
•• The grounds of the EMC filter and the PE conductor of the controller must be tied to the
same common ground. Otherwise, the EMC effect will be affected seriously.
•• The EMC filter should be installed as closely as possible to the power input side of the
controller.
The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and models of EMC filters for the
NICE7000 controller. Select a proper one based on actual requirements.

- 225 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 9 EMC NICE7000 User Manual

Table 9-1 Recommended manufacturers and models of EMC filter

Rated
Power AC Input Filter
Input AC Input Filter
Controller Model Capacity Model (Changzhou
Current Model (Schaffner)
(kVA) Jianli)
(A)
Three-phase 380 V
NICE-LQX-4002-A/B/C0 4.0 6.5 DL-10EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
NICE-LQX-4003-A/B/C0 5.9 10.5 DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
NICE-LQX-4005-A/B/C0 8.9 14.8 DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 11.0 20.5 DL-25EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 17.0 29.0 DL-35EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 21.0 36.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-42-33
NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 24.0 41.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-42-33
NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 30.0 49.5 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-55-34
NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 40.0 62.0 DL-65EBK5 FN 3258-75-34
NICE-LQX-4037-A/B/C0 57.0 77.0 DL-80EBK5 FN 3258-100-35
NICE-LQX-4045-A/B/C0 69.0 93.0 DL-100EBK5 FN 3258-100-35
NICE-LQX-4055-A/B/C0 85.0 113.0 DL-130EBK5 FN3258-130-35
Three-phase 220 V
NICE-LQX-2002-A/B/C0 4.0 11.0 DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
NICE-LQX-2003-A/B/C0 5.9 17.0 DL-25EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
220-NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 17.0 29.0 DL-35EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
220-NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 21.0 36.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
220-NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 24.0 41.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
220-NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 30.0 40.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
220-NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 40.0 49.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
220-NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 57.0 61.0 DL-65EBK5 FN 3258-42-33
Single-phase 220 V
NICE-LQX-2002-A/B/C0 2.3 13.2 DL-20TH1 FN2090-20-06
NICE-LQX-2003-A/B/C0 3.4 17.0 DL-20TH1 FN2090-20-06
220-NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 9.8 29.0 DL-30TH1 FN2090-30-08
220-NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 12.1 36.0 DL-40K3 -
220-NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 13.9 41.0 DL-50T3 -
220-NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 17.3 40.0 DL-50T3 -
220-NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 23.1 49.0 DL-50T3 -
220-NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 33.0 61.0 DL-70TH1 -

- 226 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 9 EMC

9.3.2 Installation of AC Input Reactor on Power Input Side

An AC input reactor is installed to eliminate the harmonics of the input current. As an optional
device, the reactor can be installed externally to meet strict requirements of an application
environment for harmonics. The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and
models of input reactors.
Table 9-2 Recommended manufacturers and models of AC input reactors

Power Capacity Rated Input AC Input Reactor Model

Controller Model
(kVA) Current (A) (Inovance)
Three-phase 380 V
NICE-LQX-4002-A/B/C0 4.0 6.5 MD-ACL-7-4T-222-2%
NICE-LQX-4003-A/B/C0 5.9 10.5 MD-ACL-10-4T-372-2%
NICE-LQX-4005-A/B/C0 8.9 14.8 MD-ACL-15-4T-552-2%
NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 11.0 20.5 MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 17.0 29.0 MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 21.0 36.0 MD-ACL-40-4T-153-2%
NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 24.0 41.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 30.0 49.5 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 40.0 62.0 MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
NICE-LQX-4037-A/B/C0 57.0 77.0 MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
NICE-LQX-4045-A/B/C0 69.0 93.0 MD-ACL-120-4T-453-2%
NICE-LQX-4055-A/B/C0 85.0 113.0 MD-ACL-120-4T-453-2%
Three-phase 220 V
NICE-LQX-2002-A/B/C0 4.0 11.0 MD-ACL-15-4T-222-2%
NICE-LQX-2003-A/B/C0 5.9 17.0 MD-ACL-30-4T-222-2%
220-NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 17.0 29.0 MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
220-NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 21.0 36.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-113-2%
220-NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 24.0 41.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-153-2%
220-NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 30.0 40.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
220-NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 40.0 49.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
220-NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 57.0 61.0 MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
Single-phase 220 V
NICE-LQX-2002-A/B/C0 2.3 13.2 Consult the manufacturer.
NICE-LQX-2003-A/B/C0 3.4 17.0 Consult the manufacturer.
220-NICE-LQX-4007-A/B/C0 9.8 29.0 Consult the manufacturer.
220-NICE-LQX-4011-A/B/C0 12.1 36.0 Consult the manufacturer.

- 227 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 9 EMC NICE7000 User Manual

Power Capacity Rated Input AC Input Reactor Model

Controller Model
(kVA) Current (A) (Inovance)
220-NICE-LQX-4015-A/B/C0 13.9 41.0 Consult the manufacturer.
220-NICE-LQX-4018-A/B/C0 17.3 40.0 Consult the manufacturer.
220-NICE-LQX-4022-A/B/C0 23.1 49.0 Consult the manufacturer.
220-NICE-LQX-4030-A/B/C0 33.0 61.0 Consult the manufacturer.

9.4 Shielded Cable

9.4.1 Requirements for the Shielded Cable

The shielded cable must be used to satisfy the EMC requirements. Shielded cables are
classified into three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable. If conductivity of the cable
shield is not sufficient, add an independent PE cable, or use a four-conductor cable, of
which one phase conductor is PE cable.
The three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable are shown in the following figure.
PE conductor Shield Shield
and shield

PE PE

The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as short
as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and capacitive
current of the cable.
To suppress emission and conduction of the radio frequency interference effectively, the
shield of the shielded cable is cooper braid. The braided density of the cooper braid should
be greater than 90% to enhance the shielding efficiency and conductivity, as shown in the
following figure.
Insulation jacket Copper shield Copper braid Internal
insulator
Cable
core

It is recommended that all control cables be shielded. The grounding area of the shielded
cable should be as large as possible. A suggested method is to fix the shield on the metal
plate using the metal cable clamp so as to achieve good contact, as shown in the following
figure.

Shielded cable Metal plate

Metal cable clamp

- 228 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 9 EMC

The following figure shows the grounding method of the shielded cable.
Figure 9-1 Grounding of the shielded cable

The shield must

be grounded.

9.4.2 Installation Precautions of the Shielded Cable

•• Symmetrical shielded cable is recommended. The four-conductor shielded cable can

also be used as an input cable.
•• The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as
short as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and
capacitive current of the cable. If the motor cable is over 100 meters long, an output
filter or reactor is required.
•• It is recommended that all control cables be shielded.
•• It is recommended that a shielded cable be used as the output power cable of
the controller; the cable shield must be well grounded. For devices suffering from
interference, shielded twisted pair (STP) cable is recommended as the lead wire and the
cable shield must be well grounded.

9.4.3 Cabling Requirement

1. The motor cables must be laid far away from other cables, with recommended distance
larger than 0.5 m. The motor cables of several controllers can be laid side by side.
2. It is recommended that the motor cables, power input cables and control cables be laid
in different ducts. To avoid electromagnetic interference caused by rapid change of the
output voltage of the controller, the motor cables and other cables must not be laid side
by side for a long distance.
3. If the control cable must run across the power cable, make sure they are arranged at an
angle of close to 90°. Other cables must not run across the controller.
4. The power input and output cables of the controller and weak-current signal cables
(such as control cable) should be laid vertically (if possible) rather than in parallel.
5. The cable ducts must be in good connection and well grounded. Aluminium ducts can
be used to improve electric potential.
6. The filter and controller should be connected to the cabinet properly, with spraying
protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact.
7. The motor should be connected to the system (machinery or appliance) properly, with
spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact.

- 229 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 9 EMC NICE7000 User Manual

Figure 9-2 Cabling diagram

Power cable
Power cable
Min. 200 mm 90°
Min. 300 mm
Motor cable
Control cable

NICE7000
integrated
elevator
controller
Control cable

90° Min. 500 mm

Regen. resistor cable

Motor cable

Control cable Min. 500 mm

Power cable 90° Control cable

9.5 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems

The controller generates very strong interference. Although EMC measures are taken,
the interference may still exist due to improper cabling or grounding during use. When the
controller interferes with other devices, adopt the following solutions.

Interference Type Solution

•• Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.

Leakage protection •• Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains power supply.
switch tripping •• Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable.
•• Add magnetic rings to the input drive cable.
•• Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.
•• Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains voltage.
Controller •• Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable
interference during with magnetic rings.
running
•• Add a safety capacitor to the interfered signal port or wind the signal
cable with magnetic rings.
•• Connect the equipment to the common ground.

- 230 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NICE7000 User Manual 9 EMC

Interference Type Solution

•• Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.
•• Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains voltage.
•• Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable
with magnetic rings.
Communication
interference •• Add a matching resistor between the communication cable source
and the load side.
•• Add a common grounding cable besides the communication cable.
•• Use a shielded cable as the communication cable and connect the
cable shield to the common grounding point.
•• Enlarge the capacitance at the low-speed DI. A maximum of 0.11 uF
capacitance is suggested.
I/O interference
•• Enlarge the capacitance at the AI. A maximum of 0.22 uF is
suggested.

- 231 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 9 EMC NICE7000 User Manual

- 232 -

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warranty Agreement
1. The warranty period of the product is 18 months from date of manufacturing. During the
warranty period, if the product fails or is damaged under the condition of normal use by
following the instructions, Inovance will be responsible for free maintenance.
2. Within the warranty period, maintenance will be charged for the damages caused by the
following reasons:
a. Improper use or repair/modification without prior permission
b. Fire, flood, abnormal voltage, other disasters and secondary disaster
c. Hardware damage caused by dropping or transportation after procurement
d. Improper operation
e. Damage out of the equipment (for example, external device)
3. If there is any failure or damage to the product, please correctly fill out the Product
Warranty Card in detail.
4. The maintenance fee is charged according to the latest Maintenance Price List of
Monarch.
5. The Product Warranty Card is not re-issued. Please keep the card and present it to the
maintenance personnel when asking for maintenance.
6. If there is any problem during the service, contact Monarch's agent or Monarch directly.
7. This agreement shall be interpreted by Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd.

Service Department, Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd.

Address: No.16, Youxiang Road, Yuexi Town, Wuzhong District, Suzhou, P.R.China
P.C.: 215104
Website: http://www.szmctc.cn

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Product Warranty Card
Address:

Customer
information
Company name: Contact person:

Tel. or Email:
P.C.:
Product model:

Product
information Series No. (Attach here):

Name of supplier:

(Maintenance time and content):

Failure
information
(eg. fault
code)

Maintenance person:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine